README 228.2 KB
Newer Older
W
wdenk 已提交
1
#
2
# (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013
W
wdenk 已提交
3 4
# Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de.
#
5
# SPDX-License-Identifier:	GPL-2.0+
W
wdenk 已提交
6 7 8 9 10
#

Summary:
========

11
This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for
W
wdenk 已提交
12 13 14 15
Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other
processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to
initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application
code.
W
wdenk 已提交
16 17

The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of
18 19
the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some
header files in common, and special provision has been made to
W
wdenk 已提交
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
support booting of Linux images.

Some attention has been paid to make this software easily
configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are
implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to
add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used
code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can
load and run it dynamically.


Status:
=======

In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the
34
Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered
W
wdenk 已提交
35 36
"working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems.

37 38 39 40
In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed
the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files
scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or
companies responsible for various boards and subsystems.
W
wdenk 已提交
41

42 43 44
Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the
actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically
from the Git log using:
45 46 47

	make CHANGELOG

W
wdenk 已提交
48 49 50 51

Where to get help:
==================

52
In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for
53
U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at
54 55 56 57
<u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic
on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's.
Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and
http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot
W
wdenk 已提交
58 59


60 61 62
Where to get source code:
=========================

63
The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at
64 65 66 67
git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at
http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary

The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
68
any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also
69 70 71
available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/
directory.

72
Pre-built (and tested) images are available from
73 74 75
ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/


W
wdenk 已提交
76 77 78 79
Where we come from:
===================

- start from 8xxrom sources
80
- create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot)
W
wdenk 已提交
81 82 83 84 85 86 87
- clean up code
- make it easier to add custom boards
- make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs
- extend functions, especially:
  * Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader
  * S-Record download
  * network boot
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
88
  * PCMCIA / CompactFlash / ATA disk / SCSI ... boot
89
- create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot)
W
wdenk 已提交
90
- add other CPU families (starting with ARM)
91
- create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot)
M
Magnus Lilja 已提交
92
- current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot
93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114


Names and Spelling:
===================

The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling
"U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments
in source files etc.). Example:

	This is the README file for the U-Boot project.

File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples:

	include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h

	#include <asm/u-boot.h>

Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on
the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example:

	U_BOOT_VERSION		u_boot_logo
	IH_OS_U_BOOT		u_boot_hush_start
W
wdenk 已提交
115 116


W
wdenk 已提交
117 118 119
Versioning:
===========

120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases
were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning
into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by
names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date.
Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix
releases in "stable" maintenance trees.

Examples:
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
128
	U-Boot v2009.11	    - Release November 2009
129 130
	U-Boot v2009.11.1   - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree
	U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candiate 1 for September 2010 release
W
wdenk 已提交
131 132


W
wdenk 已提交
133 134 135
Directory Hierarchy:
====================

136
/arch			Architecture specific files
137
  /arc			Files generic to ARC architecture
138 139 140 141 142 143
  /arm			Files generic to ARM architecture
  /avr32		Files generic to AVR32 architecture
  /blackfin		Files generic to Analog Devices Blackfin architecture
  /m68k			Files generic to m68k architecture
  /microblaze		Files generic to microblaze architecture
  /mips			Files generic to MIPS architecture
144
  /nds32		Files generic to NDS32 architecture
145
  /nios2		Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture
146
  /openrisc		Files generic to OpenRISC architecture
S
Stefan Roese 已提交
147
  /powerpc		Files generic to PowerPC architecture
148
  /sandbox		Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox"
149 150
  /sh			Files generic to SH architecture
  /sparc		Files generic to SPARC architecture
151
  /x86			Files generic to x86 architecture
152 153 154
/api			Machine/arch independent API for external apps
/board			Board dependent files
/common			Misc architecture independent functions
155
/configs		Board default configuration files
156 157 158
/disk			Code for disk drive partition handling
/doc			Documentation (don't expect too much)
/drivers		Commonly used device drivers
159
/dts			Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt.
160 161 162
/examples		Example code for standalone applications, etc.
/fs			Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.)
/include		Header Files
163 164
/lib			Library routines generic to all architectures
/Licenses		Various license files
165 166
/net			Networking code
/post			Power On Self Test
167 168
/scripts		Various build scripts and Makefiles
/test			Various unit test files
169
/tools			Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc.
W
wdenk 已提交
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185

Software Configuration:
=======================

Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the
rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible.

There are two classes of configuration variables:

* Configuration _OPTIONS_:
  These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with
  "CONFIG_".

* Configuration _SETTINGS_:
  These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if
  you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with
186
  "CONFIG_SYS_".
W
wdenk 已提交
187

188 189 190 191 192
Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating
symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently,
U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel,
allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your
build.
W
wdenk 已提交
193 194 195 196 197 198


Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type:
---------------------------------------------------

For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default
199
configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig".
W
wdenk 已提交
200 201 202 203

Example: For a TQM823L module type:

	cd u-boot
204
	make TQM823L_defconfig
W
wdenk 已提交
205

206 207 208
Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board
you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file
doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards.
W
wdenk 已提交
209

210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217
Sandbox Environment:
--------------------

U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox'
board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture-
specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to
run some of U-Boot's tests.

218
See board/sandbox/README.sandbox for more details.
219 220


221 222 223 224
Board Initialisation Flow:
--------------------------

This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both
225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240
SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules).

Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in
more detail later in this file.

At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names
and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures
may not conform to this.  At least most ARM boards which use
CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this.

Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly
CPU-specific) start.S file, such as:

	- arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S
	- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S
	- arch/mips/cpu/start.S
241

242 243
and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and
limitations of each of these functions are described below.
244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301

lowlevel_init():
	- purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f()
	- no global_data or BSS
	- there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed)
	- must not set up SDRAM or use console
	- must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to
		board_init_f()
	- this is almost never needed
	- return normally from this function

board_init_f():
	- purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r():
		i.e. SDRAM and serial UART
	- global_data is available
	- stack is in SRAM
	- BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables,
		only stack variables and global_data

	Non-SPL-specific notes:
	- dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this
		can do nothing

	SPL-specific notes:
	- you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own
		version as needed.
	- preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis
	- should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work
	- these is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S
	- must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r()
		directly)

Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at
this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below
CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of
memory.

board_init_r():
	- purpose: main execution, common code
	- global_data is available
	- SDRAM is available
	- BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used
	- execution eventually continues to main_loop()

	Non-SPL-specific notes:
	- U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from
		there.

	SPL-specific notes:
	- stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and
		CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM
	- preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is
		done by defining CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a
		spl_board_init() function containing this call
	- loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux



W
wdenk 已提交
302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312
Configuration Options:
----------------------

Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all
such information is kept in a configuration file
"include/configs/<board_name>.h".

Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in
"include/configs/TQM823L.h".


W
wdenk 已提交
313 314 315 316 317
Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux
kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to
build a config tool - later.


W
wdenk 已提交
318 319
The following options need to be configured:

320 321 322
- CPU Type:	Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX.

- Board Type:	Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS.
323 324

- CPU Daughterboard Type: (if CONFIG_ATSTK1000 is defined)
325
		Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_ATSTK1002
W
wdenk 已提交
326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344

- CPU Module Type: (if CONFIG_COGENT is defined)
		Define exactly one of
		CONFIG_CMA286_60_OLD
--- FIXME --- not tested yet:
		CONFIG_CMA286_60, CONFIG_CMA286_21, CONFIG_CMA286_60P,
		CONFIG_CMA287_23, CONFIG_CMA287_50

- Motherboard Type: (if CONFIG_COGENT is defined)
		Define exactly one of
		CONFIG_CMA101, CONFIG_CMA102

- Motherboard I/O Modules: (if CONFIG_COGENT is defined)
		Define one or more of
		CONFIG_CMA302

- Motherboard Options: (if CONFIG_CMA101 or CONFIG_CMA102 are defined)
		Define one or more of
		CONFIG_LCD_HEARTBEAT	- update a character position on
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
345
					  the LCD display every second with
W
wdenk 已提交
346 347
					  a "rotator" |\-/|\-/

348 349 350 351 352
- Marvell Family Member
		CONFIG_SYS_MVFS		- define it if you want to enable
					  multiple fs option at one time
					  for marvell soc family

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
353
- 8xx CPU Options: (if using an MPC8xx CPU)
W
wdenk 已提交
354 355
		CONFIG_8xx_GCLK_FREQ	- deprecated: CPU clock if
					  get_gclk_freq() cannot work
W
wdenk 已提交
356 357
					  e.g. if there is no 32KHz
					  reference PIT/RTC clock
W
wdenk 已提交
358 359
		CONFIG_8xx_OSCLK	- PLL input clock (either EXTCLK
					  or XTAL/EXTAL)
W
wdenk 已提交
360

W
wdenk 已提交
361
- 859/866/885 CPU options: (if using a MPC859 or MPC866 or MPC885 CPU):
362 363
		CONFIG_SYS_8xx_CPUCLK_MIN
		CONFIG_SYS_8xx_CPUCLK_MAX
W
wdenk 已提交
364
		CONFIG_8xx_CPUCLK_DEFAULT
365 366
			See doc/README.MPC866

367
		CONFIG_SYS_MEASURE_CPUCLK
368

W
wdenk 已提交
369 370 371 372 373
		Define this to measure the actual CPU clock instead
		of relying on the correctness of the configured
		values. Mostly useful for board bringup to make sure
		the PLL is locked at the intended frequency. Note
		that this requires a (stable) reference clock (32 kHz
374
		RTC clock or CONFIG_SYS_8XX_XIN)
375

376 377 378 379 380
		CONFIG_SYS_DELAYED_ICACHE

		Define this option if you want to enable the
		ICache only when Code runs from RAM.

381
- 85xx CPU Options:
382 383 384 385 386 387
		CONFIG_SYS_PPC64

		Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements
		the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR
		compliance, among other possible reasons.

388 389 390 391 392 393
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV

		Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the
		system clock.  On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ
		devices it can be 16 or 32.  The ratio varies from SoC to Soc.

394 395 396 397 398
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT

		Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device
		tree nodes for the given platform.

399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407
		CONFIG_SYS_PPC_E500_DEBUG_TLB

		Enables a temporary TLB entry to be used during boot to work
		around limitations in e500v1 and e500v2 external debugger
		support. This reduces the portions of the boot code where
		breakpoints and single stepping do not work.  The value of this
		symbol should be set to the TLB1 entry to be used for this
		purpose.

408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510

		Enables a workaround for erratum A004510.  If set,
		then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional)

		Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR)
		for which the A004510 workaround should be applied.

		The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision
		of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus
		p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls
		whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set.

		See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about
		this erratum.

428 429
		CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND
		Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only
430
		required during NOR boot.
431

432 433
		CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND
		Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only
434
		required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision
435

436 437 438 439 440
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY

		This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600
		according to the A004510 workaround.

441 442 443 444
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR
		This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is
		connected exclusively to the DSP cores.

445 446 447 448
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR
		This value denotes start offset of M2 memory
		which is directly connected to the DSP core.

449 450 451 452
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR
		This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly
		connected to the DSP core.

453 454 455
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT
		This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space.

456 457 458 459 460
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK
		Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's.
		In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply
		clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock.

461 462
		CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F
		This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the
B
Bin Meng 已提交
463
		time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized.
464

465
		CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP
466
		Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is
467 468
		supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up.

469
- Generic CPU options:
470 471 472 473 474 475
		CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_GLOBAL_DATA
		Defines global data is initialized in generic board board_init_f().
		If this macro is defined, global data is created and cleared in
		generic board board_init_f(). Without this macro, architecture/board
		should initialize global data before calling board_init_f().

476 477 478 479 480
		CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN

		Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those
		values is arch specific.

481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR
		Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is
		found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core
		SoCs.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR
		Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU
		Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as
		deskew training are not available.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1
		Freescale DDR1 controller.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2
		Freescale DDR2 controller.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3
		Freescale DDR3 controller.

502 503 504
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4
		Freescale DDR4 controller.

505 506 507
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3
		Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs.

508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1
		Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with
		Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board
		implemetation.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2
		Board config to use DDR2. It can be eanbeld for SoCs with
		Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board
		implementation.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3
		Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with
520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528
		Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L
		Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with
		DDR3L controllers.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4
		Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with
		DDR4 controllers.
529

530 531 532 533 534 535
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE
		Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE
		Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian

536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI
		It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image.
		Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW
		It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image.
		PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution.
		Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details

545 546 547 548
		CONFIG_SPL_FSL_PBL
		It adds a target to create boot binary having SPL binary in PBI format
		concatenated with u-boot binary.

549 550 551 552 553 554
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE
		Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE
		Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian

555 556 557 558 559
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY
		Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the
		same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for  all Power SoCs. But
		it could be different for ARM SoCs.

560 561 562 563 564
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B
		DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special
		interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape
		SoCs with ARM core.

565 566 567 568 569 570
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS
		Number of controllers used as main memory.

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS
		Number of controllers used for other than main memory.

571 572 573
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR
		Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA.

574 575 576 577 578 579
		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE
		Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian

		CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE
		Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian

580
- Intel Monahans options:
581
		CONFIG_SYS_MONAHANS_RUN_MODE_OSC_RATIO
582 583 584 585 586

		Defines the Monahans run mode to oscillator
		ratio. Valid values are 8, 16, 24, 31. The core
		frequency is this value multiplied by 13 MHz.

587
		CONFIG_SYS_MONAHANS_TURBO_RUN_MODE_RATIO
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
588

589 590
		Defines the Monahans turbo mode to oscillator
		ratio. Valid values are 1 (default if undefined) and
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
591
		2. The core frequency as calculated above is multiplied
592
		by this value.
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
593

594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625
- MIPS CPU options:
		CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET

		Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack
		pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before
		relocation.

		CONFIG_SYS_MIPS_CACHE_MODE

		Cache operation mode for the MIPS CPU.
		See also arch/mips/include/asm/mipsregs.h.
		Possible values are:
			CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NO_WA
			CONF_CM_CACHABLE_WA
			CONF_CM_UNCACHED
			CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NONCOHERENT
			CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CE
			CONF_CM_CACHABLE_COW
			CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CUW
			CONF_CM_CACHABLE_ACCELERATED

		CONFIG_SYS_XWAY_EBU_BOOTCFG

		Special option for Lantiq XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash.
		See also arch/mips/cpu/mips32/start.S.

		CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES

		Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq
		XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to
		be swapped if a flash programmer is used.

626 627 628 629 630 631
- ARM options:
		CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH

		Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not
		clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15.

A
Aneesh V 已提交
632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639
		CONFIG_SYS_THUMB_BUILD

		Use this flag to build U-Boot using the Thumb instruction
		set for ARM architectures. Thumb instruction set provides
		better code density. For ARM architectures that support
		Thumb2 this flag will result in Thumb2 code generated by
		GCC.

640
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_716044
641 642 643
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_742230
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_743622
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_751472
644
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_761320
645 646 647
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_773022
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_774769
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_794072
648 649 650 651 652 653 654

		If set, the workarounds for these ARM errata are applied early
		during U-Boot startup. Note that these options force the
		workarounds to be applied; no CPU-type/version detection
		exists, unlike the similar options in the Linux kernel. Do not
		set these options unless they apply!

655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662
		COUNTER_FREQUENCY
		Generic timer clock source frequency.

		COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL
		Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is
		different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined
		at run time.

663 664 665
		NOTE: The following can be machine specific errata. These
		do have ability to provide rudimentary version and machine
		specific checks, but expect no product checks.
666
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_430973
667
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_454179
668
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_621766
669
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_798870
670
		CONFIG_ARM_ERRATA_801819
671

672 673 674 675 676 677 678
- Tegra SoC options:
		CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE

		Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain
		impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode,
		such as ARM architectural timer initialization.

W
wdenk 已提交
679
- Linux Kernel Interface:
W
wdenk 已提交
680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689
		CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ

		U-Boot stores all clock information in Hz
		internally. For binary compatibility with older Linux
		kernels (which expect the clocks passed in the
		bd_info data to be in MHz) the environment variable
		"clocks_in_mhz" can be defined so that U-Boot
		converts clock data to MHZ before passing it to the
		Linux kernel.
		When CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ is defined, a definition of
690
		"clocks_in_mhz=1" is automatically included in the
W
wdenk 已提交
691 692
		default environment.

W
wdenk 已提交
693 694
		CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES		[relevant for MIPS only]

695
		When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions
W
wdenk 已提交
696 697 698
		expect it to be in bytes, others in MB.
		Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes.

699
		CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
700 701

		New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be
702 703 704 705 706 707
		passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware
		concepts).

		CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
		 * New libfdt-based support
		 * Adds the "fdt" command
708
		 * The bootm command automatically updates the fdt
709

710 711 712 713
		OF_CPU - The proper name of the cpus node (only required for
			MPC512X and MPC5xxx based boards).
		OF_SOC - The proper name of the soc node (only required for
			MPC512X and MPC5xxx based boards).
714
		OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency.
K
Kumar Gala 已提交
715
		OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device
716

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
717 718
		boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC
		addresses
719

720 721 722 723
		CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP

		Board code has addition modification that it wants to make
		to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel
724

725 726 727 728 729 730 731
		CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP

		Other code has addition modification that it wants to make
		to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel.
		This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting
		the kernel.

732 733
		CONFIG_OF_BOOT_CPU

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
734
		This define fills in the correct boot CPU in the boot
735 736
		param header, the default value is zero if undefined.

737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745
		CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP

		U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not.
		If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot
		removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux,
		so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and
		crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where
		no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7.

746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755
		CONFIG_MACH_TYPE	[relevant for ARM only][mandatory]

		This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one
		machine type and must be used to specify the machine type
		number as it appears in the ARM machine registry
		(see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/).
		Only boards that have multiple machine types supported
		in a single configuration file and the machine type is
		runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting.

756 757 758
- vxWorks boot parameters:

		bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following
759 760
		environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask,
		serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs.
761 762 763 764 765
		It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile.

		Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride
		the defaults discussed just above.

766 767 768 769 770
- Cache Configuration:
		CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF - Do not enable instruction cache in U-Boot
		CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF - Do not enable data cache in U-Boot
		CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot

A
Aneesh V 已提交
771 772 773 774 775 776
- Cache Configuration for ARM:
		CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache
				      controller
		CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310
					controller register space

W
wdenk 已提交
777
- Serial Ports:
778
		CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL
W
wdenk 已提交
779 780 781

		Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs.

782
		CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL
W
wdenk 已提交
783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796

		Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs.

		CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK

		If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to
		the clock speed of the UARTs.

		CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS

		If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board,
		define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported)
		port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h

797 798 799 800
		CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL

		Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver.
		Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver
W
wdenk 已提交
801

W
wdenk 已提交
802
- Console Interface:
W
wdenk 已提交
803 804 805 806
		Depending on board, define exactly one serial port
		(like CONFIG_8xx_CONS_SMC1, CONFIG_8xx_CONS_SMC2,
		CONFIG_8xx_CONS_SCC1, ...), or switch off the serial
		console by defining CONFIG_8xx_CONS_NONE
W
wdenk 已提交
807 808 809 810 811 812 813

		Note: if CONFIG_8xx_CONS_NONE is defined, the serial
		port routines must be defined elsewhere
		(i.e. serial_init(), serial_getc(), ...)

		CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE
		Enables console device for a color framebuffer. Needs following
814
		defines (cf. smiLynxEM, i8042)
W
wdenk 已提交
815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823
			VIDEO_FB_LITTLE_ENDIAN	graphic memory organisation
						(default big endian)
			VIDEO_HW_RECTFILL	graphic chip supports
						rectangle fill
						(cf. smiLynxEM)
			VIDEO_HW_BITBLT		graphic chip supports
						bit-blit (cf. smiLynxEM)
			VIDEO_VISIBLE_COLS	visible pixel columns
						(cols=pitch)
W
wdenk 已提交
824 825
			VIDEO_VISIBLE_ROWS	visible pixel rows
			VIDEO_PIXEL_SIZE	bytes per pixel
W
wdenk 已提交
826 827
			VIDEO_DATA_FORMAT	graphic data format
						(0-5, cf. cfb_console.c)
W
wdenk 已提交
828
			VIDEO_FB_ADRS		framebuffer address
W
wdenk 已提交
829
			VIDEO_KBD_INIT_FCT	keyboard int fct
830
						(i.e. rx51_kp_init())
W
wdenk 已提交
831
			VIDEO_TSTC_FCT		test char fct
832
						(i.e. rx51_kp_tstc)
W
wdenk 已提交
833
			VIDEO_GETC_FCT		get char fct
834
						(i.e. rx51_kp_getc)
W
wdenk 已提交
835 836
			CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO	display Linux logo in
						upper left corner
837 838 839
			CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO	use bmp_logo.h instead of
						linux_logo.h for logo.
						Requires CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO
W
wdenk 已提交
840
			CONFIG_CONSOLE_EXTRA_INFO
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
841
						additional board info beside
W
wdenk 已提交
842 843
						the logo

844 845 846 847
		When CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE_ANSI is defined, console will support
		a limited number of ANSI escape sequences (cursor control,
		erase functions and limited graphics rendition control).

W
wdenk 已提交
848 849 850
		When CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE is defined, video console is
		default i/o. Serial console can be forced with
		environment 'console=serial'.
W
wdenk 已提交
851

W
wdenk 已提交
852 853 854 855
		When CONFIG_SILENT_CONSOLE is defined, all console
		messages (by U-Boot and Linux!) can be silenced with
		the "silent" environment variable. See
		doc/README.silent for more information.
W
wdenk 已提交
856

857 858 859 860 861
		CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_BG_COL: define the backgroundcolor, default
			is 0x00.
		CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_FG_COL: define the foregroundcolor, default
			is 0xa0.

W
wdenk 已提交
862 863 864
- Console Baudrate:
		CONFIG_BAUDRATE - in bps
		Select one of the baudrates listed in
865 866
		CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
		CONFIG_SYS_BRGCLK_PRESCALE, baudrate prescale
W
wdenk 已提交
867

868 869 870
- Console Rx buffer length
		With CONFIG_SYS_SMC_RXBUFLEN it is possible to define
		the maximum receive buffer length for the SMC.
871
		This option is actual only for 82xx and 8xx possible.
872 873 874 875
		If using CONFIG_SYS_SMC_RXBUFLEN also CONFIG_SYS_MAXIDLE
		must be defined, to setup the maximum idle timeout for
		the SMC.

876
- Pre-Console Buffer:
877 878 879 880 881 882 883
		Prior to the console being initialised (i.e. serial UART
		initialised etc) all console output is silently discarded.
		Defining CONFIG_PRE_CONSOLE_BUFFER will cause U-Boot to
		buffer any console messages prior to the console being
		initialised to a buffer of size CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_SZ
		bytes located at CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_ADDR. The buffer is
		a circular buffer, so if more than CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_SZ
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
884
		bytes are output before the console is initialised, the
885 886
		earlier bytes are discarded.

887 888 889
		Note that when printing the buffer a copy is made on the
		stack so CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_SZ must fit on the stack.

890 891
		'Sane' compilers will generate smaller code if
		CONFIG_PRE_CON_BUF_SZ is a power of 2
892

W
wdenk 已提交
893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900
- Autoboot Command:
		CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
		Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled;
		define a command string that is automatically executed
		when no character is read on the console interface
		within "Boot Delay" after reset.

		CONFIG_BOOTARGS
W
wdenk 已提交
901 902 903
		This can be used to pass arguments to the bootm
		command. The value of CONFIG_BOOTARGS goes into the
		environment value "bootargs".
W
wdenk 已提交
904 905

		CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT
W
wdenk 已提交
906 907 908
		The value of these goes into the environment as
		"ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used
		as a convenience, when switching between booting from
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
909
		RAM and NFS.
W
wdenk 已提交
910

911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926
- Bootcount:
		CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT
		Implements a mechanism for detecting a repeating reboot
		cycle, see:
		http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit

		CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ENV
		If no softreset save registers are found on the hardware
		"bootcount" is stored in the environment. To prevent a
		saveenv on all reboots, the environment variable
		"upgrade_available" is used. If "upgrade_available" is
		0, "bootcount" is always 0, if "upgrade_available" is
		1 "bootcount" is incremented in the environment.
		So the Userspace Applikation must set the "upgrade_available"
		and "bootcount" variable to 0, if a boot was successfully.

W
wdenk 已提交
927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951
- Pre-Boot Commands:
		CONFIG_PREBOOT

		When this option is #defined, the existence of the
		environment variable "preboot" will be checked
		immediately before starting the CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
		countdown and/or running the auto-boot command resp.
		entering interactive mode.

		This feature is especially useful when "preboot" is
		automatically generated or modified. For an example
		see the LWMON board specific code: here "preboot" is
		modified when the user holds down a certain
		combination of keys on the (special) keyboard when
		booting the systems

- Serial Download Echo Mode:
		CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
		If defined to 1, all characters received during a
		serial download (using the "loads" command) are
		echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal
		emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take
		time on others. This setting #define's the initial
		value of the "loads_echo" environment variable.

952
- Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined)
W
wdenk 已提交
953 954
		CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE
		Select one of the baudrates listed in
955
		CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
W
wdenk 已提交
956 957

- Monitor Functions:
958 959
		Monitor commands can be included or excluded
		from the build by using the #include files
960
		<config_cmd_all.h> and #undef'ing unwanted
961
		commands, or adding #define's for wanted commands.
962 963 964 965

		The default command configuration includes all commands
		except those marked below with a "*".

966
		CONFIG_CMD_AES		  AES 128 CBC encrypt/decrypt
967 968 969 970 971 972
		CONFIG_CMD_ASKENV	* ask for env variable
		CONFIG_CMD_BDI		  bdinfo
		CONFIG_CMD_BEDBUG	* Include BedBug Debugger
		CONFIG_CMD_BMP		* BMP support
		CONFIG_CMD_BSP		* Board specific commands
		CONFIG_CMD_BOOTD	  bootd
973
		CONFIG_CMD_BOOTI	* ARM64 Linux kernel Image support
974
		CONFIG_CMD_CACHE	* icache, dcache
M
Michal Simek 已提交
975
		CONFIG_CMD_CLK   	* clock command support
976
		CONFIG_CMD_CONSOLE	  coninfo
M
Mike Frysinger 已提交
977
		CONFIG_CMD_CRC32	* crc32
978 979 980
		CONFIG_CMD_DATE		* support for RTC, date/time...
		CONFIG_CMD_DHCP		* DHCP support
		CONFIG_CMD_DIAG		* Diagnostics
981 982 983 984
		CONFIG_CMD_DS4510	* ds4510 I2C gpio commands
		CONFIG_CMD_DS4510_INFO	* ds4510 I2C info command
		CONFIG_CMD_DS4510_MEM	* ds4510 I2C eeprom/sram commansd
		CONFIG_CMD_DS4510_RST	* ds4510 I2C rst command
985 986
		CONFIG_CMD_DTT		* Digital Therm and Thermostat
		CONFIG_CMD_ECHO		  echo arguments
P
Peter Tyser 已提交
987
		CONFIG_CMD_EDITENV	  edit env variable
988
		CONFIG_CMD_EEPROM	* EEPROM read/write support
989
		CONFIG_CMD_EEPROM_LAYOUT* EEPROM layout aware commands
990
		CONFIG_CMD_ELF		* bootelf, bootvx
991
		CONFIG_CMD_ENV_CALLBACK	* display details about env callbacks
992
		CONFIG_CMD_ENV_FLAGS	* display details about env flags
993
		CONFIG_CMD_ENV_EXISTS	* check existence of env variable
994
		CONFIG_CMD_EXPORTENV	* export the environment
995 996
		CONFIG_CMD_EXT2		* ext2 command support
		CONFIG_CMD_EXT4		* ext4 command support
997 998
		CONFIG_CMD_FS_GENERIC	* filesystem commands (e.g. load, ls)
					  that work for multiple fs types
999
		CONFIG_CMD_FS_UUID	* Look up a filesystem UUID
1000
		CONFIG_CMD_SAVEENV	  saveenv
1001
		CONFIG_CMD_FDC		* Floppy Disk Support
1002
		CONFIG_CMD_FAT		* FAT command support
1003 1004
		CONFIG_CMD_FLASH	  flinfo, erase, protect
		CONFIG_CMD_FPGA		  FPGA device initialization support
1005
		CONFIG_CMD_FUSE		* Device fuse support
A
Anton Staaf 已提交
1006
		CONFIG_CMD_GETTIME	* Get time since boot
M
Mike Frysinger 已提交
1007
		CONFIG_CMD_GO		* the 'go' command (exec code)
K
Kim Phillips 已提交
1008
		CONFIG_CMD_GREPENV	* search environment
1009
		CONFIG_CMD_HASH		* calculate hash / digest
1010 1011 1012
		CONFIG_CMD_I2C		* I2C serial bus support
		CONFIG_CMD_IDE		* IDE harddisk support
		CONFIG_CMD_IMI		  iminfo
1013
		CONFIG_CMD_IMLS		  List all images found in NOR flash
1014
		CONFIG_CMD_IMLS_NAND	* List all images found in NAND flash
1015
		CONFIG_CMD_IMMAP	* IMMR dump support
S
Simon Glass 已提交
1016
		CONFIG_CMD_IOTRACE	* I/O tracing for debugging
1017
		CONFIG_CMD_IMPORTENV	* import an environment
J
Joe Hershberger 已提交
1018
		CONFIG_CMD_INI		* import data from an ini file into the env
1019 1020 1021 1022
		CONFIG_CMD_IRQ		* irqinfo
		CONFIG_CMD_ITEST	  Integer/string test of 2 values
		CONFIG_CMD_JFFS2	* JFFS2 Support
		CONFIG_CMD_KGDB		* kgdb
1023
		CONFIG_CMD_LDRINFO	* ldrinfo (display Blackfin loader)
1024 1025
		CONFIG_CMD_LINK_LOCAL	* link-local IP address auto-configuration
					  (169.254.*.*)
1026 1027
		CONFIG_CMD_LOADB	  loadb
		CONFIG_CMD_LOADS	  loads
1028
		CONFIG_CMD_MD5SUM	* print md5 message digest
R
Robin Getz 已提交
1029
					  (requires CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY and CONFIG_MD5)
1030
		CONFIG_CMD_MEMINFO	* Display detailed memory information
1031
		CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY	  md, mm, nm, mw, cp, cmp, crc, base,
1032
					  loop, loopw
1033
		CONFIG_CMD_MEMTEST	* mtest
1034 1035 1036
		CONFIG_CMD_MISC		  Misc functions like sleep etc
		CONFIG_CMD_MMC		* MMC memory mapped support
		CONFIG_CMD_MII		* MII utility commands
1037
		CONFIG_CMD_MTDPARTS	* MTD partition support
1038 1039
		CONFIG_CMD_NAND		* NAND support
		CONFIG_CMD_NET		  bootp, tftpboot, rarpboot
1040
		CONFIG_CMD_NFS		  NFS support
1041
		CONFIG_CMD_PCA953X	* PCA953x I2C gpio commands
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1042
		CONFIG_CMD_PCA953X_INFO * PCA953x I2C gpio info command
1043 1044 1045 1046 1047
		CONFIG_CMD_PCI		* pciinfo
		CONFIG_CMD_PCMCIA		* PCMCIA support
		CONFIG_CMD_PING		* send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network
					  host
		CONFIG_CMD_PORTIO	* Port I/O
1048
		CONFIG_CMD_READ		* Read raw data from partition
1049 1050
		CONFIG_CMD_REGINFO	* Register dump
		CONFIG_CMD_RUN		  run command in env variable
1051
		CONFIG_CMD_SANDBOX	* sb command to access sandbox features
1052
		CONFIG_CMD_SAVES	* save S record dump
1053
		CONFIG_SCSI		* SCSI Support
1054 1055 1056 1057
		CONFIG_CMD_SDRAM	* print SDRAM configuration information
					  (requires CONFIG_CMD_I2C)
		CONFIG_CMD_SETGETDCR	  Support for DCR Register access
					  (4xx only)
1058
		CONFIG_CMD_SF		* Read/write/erase SPI NOR flash
1059
		CONFIG_CMD_SHA1SUM	* print sha1 memory digest
R
Robin Getz 已提交
1060
					  (requires CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY)
1061
		CONFIG_CMD_SOFTSWITCH	* Soft switch setting command for BF60x
1062
		CONFIG_CMD_SOURCE	  "source" command Support
1063
		CONFIG_CMD_SPI		* SPI serial bus support
L
Luca Ceresoli 已提交
1064
		CONFIG_CMD_TFTPSRV	* TFTP transfer in server mode
S
Simon Glass 已提交
1065
		CONFIG_CMD_TFTPPUT	* TFTP put command (upload)
1066 1067
		CONFIG_CMD_TIME		* run command and report execution time (ARM specific)
		CONFIG_CMD_TIMER	* access to the system tick timer
1068 1069
		CONFIG_CMD_USB		* USB support
		CONFIG_CMD_CDP		* Cisco Discover Protocol support
1070
		CONFIG_CMD_MFSL		* Microblaze FSL support
1071
		CONFIG_CMD_XIMG		  Load part of Multi Image
1072
		CONFIG_CMD_UUID		* Generate random UUID or GUID string
W
wdenk 已提交
1073 1074 1075 1076

		EXAMPLE: If you want all functions except of network
		support you can write:

1077 1078
		#include "config_cmd_all.h"
		#undef CONFIG_CMD_NET
W
wdenk 已提交
1079

1080 1081
	Other Commands:
		fdt (flattened device tree) command: CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
W
wdenk 已提交
1082 1083

	Note:	Don't enable the "icache" and "dcache" commands
1084
		(configuration option CONFIG_CMD_CACHE) unless you know
W
wdenk 已提交
1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090
		what you (and your U-Boot users) are doing. Data
		cache cannot be enabled on systems like the 8xx or
		8260 (where accesses to the IMMR region must be
		uncached), and it cannot be disabled on all other
		systems where we (mis-) use the data cache to hold an
		initial stack and some data.
W
wdenk 已提交
1091 1092 1093 1094


		XXX - this list needs to get updated!

1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102
- Removal of commands
		If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable
		CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line
		will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the
		boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command()
		instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very
		simple boot procedures.

1103 1104
- Regular expression support:
		CONFIG_REGEX
1105 1106 1107 1108
		If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against
		the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library,
		which adds regex support to some commands, as for
		example "env grep" and "setexpr".
1109

1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117
- Device tree:
		CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
		If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree
		to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically
		compiled #defines in the board file. This option is
		experimental and only available on a few boards. The device
		tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob.

1118 1119
		U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can
		be done using one of the two options below:
1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126

		CONFIG_OF_EMBED
		If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree
		binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the
		board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file
		is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through
		the global data structure as gd->blob.
1127

1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139
		CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE
		If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree
		binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific
		code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by:

			cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin

		and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called
		u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can
		still use the individual files if you need something more
		exotic.

W
wdenk 已提交
1140 1141 1142
- Watchdog:
		CONFIG_WATCHDOG
		If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog
1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153
		support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC
		specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx and 8260
		CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR
		register.  When supported for a specific SoC is
		available, then no further board specific code should
		be needed to use it.

		CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG
		When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used
		SoC, then define this variable and provide board
		specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function.
W
wdenk 已提交
1154

1155 1156 1157
		CONFIG_AT91_HW_WDT_TIMEOUT
		specify the timeout in seconds. default 2 seconds.

1158 1159 1160 1161 1162
- U-Boot Version:
		CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE
		If this variable is defined, an environment variable
		named "ver" is created by U-Boot showing the U-Boot
		version as printed by the "version" command.
1163 1164
		Any change to this variable will be reverted at the
		next reset.
1165

W
wdenk 已提交
1166 1167
- Real-Time Clock:

1168
		When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC
W
wdenk 已提交
1169 1170 1171 1172 1173
		has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the
		following options:

		CONFIG_RTC_MPC8xx	- use internal RTC of MPC8xx
		CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563	- use Philips PCF8563 RTC
1174
		CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX	- use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC
W
wdenk 已提交
1175
		CONFIG_RTC_MC146818	- use MC146818 RTC
W
wdenk 已提交
1176
		CONFIG_RTC_DS1307	- use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC
W
wdenk 已提交
1177
		CONFIG_RTC_DS1337	- use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC
W
wdenk 已提交
1178
		CONFIG_RTC_DS1338	- use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC
1179
		CONFIG_RTC_DS1339	- use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC
W
wdenk 已提交
1180
		CONFIG_RTC_DS164x	- use Dallas DS164x RTC
T
Tor Krill 已提交
1181
		CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208	- use Intersil ISL1208 RTC
W
wdenk 已提交
1182
		CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900	- use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC
1183
		CONFIG_SYS_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC	- Turn off the OSC output for DS1337
1184 1185
		CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR	- enable trickle charger on
					  RV3029 RTC.
W
wdenk 已提交
1186

W
wdenk 已提交
1187 1188 1189
		Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface
		must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.

1190 1191 1192
- GPIO Support:
		CONFIG_PCA953X		- use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO

C
Chris Packham 已提交
1193 1194 1195 1196
		The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of
		chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of
		pins supported by a particular chip.

1197 1198 1199
		Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface
		must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.

S
Simon Glass 已提交
1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221
- I/O tracing:
		When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O
		accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out
		to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is
		useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that
		the driver behaves the same way before and after a code
		change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To
		add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>'
		to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test.

		Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below.
		Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will
		still continue to operate.

			iotrace is enabled
			Start:  10000000	(buffer start address)
			Size:   00010000	(buffer size)
			Offset: 00000120	(current buffer offset)
			Output: 10000120	(start + offset)
			Count:  00000018	(number of trace records)
			CRC32:  9526fb66	(CRC32 of all trace records)

W
wdenk 已提交
1222 1223
- Timestamp Support:

W
wdenk 已提交
1224 1225 1226
		When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp
		(date and time) of an image is printed by image
		commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is
1227
		automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE .
W
wdenk 已提交
1228

1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238
- Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported:
		Zero or more of the following:
		CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION   Apple's MacOS partition table.
		CONFIG_DOS_PARTITION   MS Dos partition table, traditional on the
				       Intel architecture, USB sticks, etc.
		CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION   ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc.
		CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION   GPT partition table, common when EFI is the
				       bootloader.  Note 2TB partition limit; see
				       disk/part_efi.c
		CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS  Memory Technology Device partition table.
W
wdenk 已提交
1239

1240
		If IDE or SCSI support is enabled (CONFIG_CMD_IDE or
1241
		CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at
1242
		least one non-MTD partition type as well.
W
wdenk 已提交
1243 1244

- IDE Reset method:
W
wdenk 已提交
1245 1246
		CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several
		board configurations files but used nowhere!
W
wdenk 已提交
1247

W
wdenk 已提交
1248 1249 1250 1251
		CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will
		be performed by calling the function
			ide_set_reset(int reset)
		which has to be defined in a board specific file
W
wdenk 已提交
1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257

- ATAPI Support:
		CONFIG_ATAPI

		Set this to enable ATAPI support.

W
wdenk 已提交
1258 1259 1260 1261
- LBA48 Support
		CONFIG_LBA48

		Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB
1262
		Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA.
W
wdenk 已提交
1263 1264 1265
		Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only'
		support disks up to 2.1TB.

1266
		CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA:
W
wdenk 已提交
1267 1268 1269
			When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses.
			Default is 32bit.

W
wdenk 已提交
1270 1271 1272 1273 1274
- SCSI Support:
		At the moment only there is only support for the
		SYM53C8XX SCSI controller; define
		CONFIG_SCSI_SYM53C8XX to enable it.

1275 1276 1277
		CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and
		CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID *
		CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the
W
wdenk 已提交
1278 1279
		maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target
		devices.
1280
		CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_SYM53C8XX_CCF to fix clock timing (80Mhz)
W
wdenk 已提交
1281

1282 1283
		The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of
		SCSI devices found during the last scan.
1284

W
wdenk 已提交
1285
- NETWORK Support (PCI):
1286
		CONFIG_E1000
1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300
		Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips.

		CONFIG_E1000_SPI
		Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x.
		This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one
		of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC.

		CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC
		Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for
		example with the "sspi" command.

		CONFIG_CMD_E1000
		Management command for E1000 devices.  When used on devices
		with SPI support you can reprogram the EEPROM from U-Boot.
S
stroese 已提交
1301

W
wdenk 已提交
1302 1303
		CONFIG_EEPRO100
		Support for Intel 82557/82559/82559ER chips.
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
1304
		Optional CONFIG_EEPRO100_SROM_WRITE enables EEPROM
W
wdenk 已提交
1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317
		write routine for first time initialisation.

		CONFIG_TULIP
		Support for Digital 2114x chips.
		Optional CONFIG_TULIP_SELECT_MEDIA for board specific
		modem chip initialisation (KS8761/QS6611).

		CONFIG_NATSEMI
		Support for National dp83815 chips.

		CONFIG_NS8382X
		Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips.

W
wdenk 已提交
1318 1319
- NETWORK Support (other):

1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329
		CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC
		Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC.

			CONFIG_RMII
			Define this to use reduced MII inteface

			CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET
			If this defined, the driver is quiet.
			The driver doen't show link status messages.

R
Rob Herring 已提交
1330 1331 1332
		CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC
		Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device

1333
		CONFIG_LAN91C96
W
wdenk 已提交
1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342
		Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips.

			CONFIG_LAN91C96_BASE
			Define this to hold the physical address
			of the LAN91C96's I/O space

			CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT
			Define this to enable 32 bit addressing

1343
		CONFIG_SMC91111
W
wdenk 已提交
1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356
		Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip

			CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE
			Define this to hold the physical address
			of the device (I/O space)

			CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT
			Define this if data bus is 32 bits

			CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS
			Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros
			(some hardware wont work with macros)

1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362
		CONFIG_DRIVER_TI_EMAC
		Support for davinci emac

			CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT
			Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs.

1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374
		CONFIG_FTGMAC100
		Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet

			CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA
			Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY.
			Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY.
			If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur
			wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or
			useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit
			control registers. This behavior won't affect the
			correctnessof 10/100 link speed update.

1375
		CONFIG_SMC911X
J
Jens Gehrlein 已提交
1376 1377
		Support for SMSC's LAN911x and LAN921x chips

1378
			CONFIG_SMC911X_BASE
J
Jens Gehrlein 已提交
1379 1380 1381
			Define this to hold the physical address
			of the device (I/O space)

1382
			CONFIG_SMC911X_32_BIT
J
Jens Gehrlein 已提交
1383 1384
			Define this if data bus is 32 bits

1385
			CONFIG_SMC911X_16_BIT
J
Jens Gehrlein 已提交
1386 1387
			Define this if data bus is 16 bits. If your processor
			automatically converts one 32 bit word to two 16 bit
1388
			words you may also try CONFIG_SMC911X_32_BIT.
J
Jens Gehrlein 已提交
1389

1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398
		CONFIG_SH_ETHER
		Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller

			CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT
			Define the number of ports to be used

			CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR
			Define the ETH PHY's address

1399 1400 1401
			CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK
			If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush.

1402 1403 1404 1405
- PWM Support:
		CONFIG_PWM_IMX
		Support for PWM modul on the imx6.

1406
- TPM Support:
1407 1408 1409
		CONFIG_TPM
		Support TPM devices.

1410 1411
		CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON
		Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device
1412 1413 1414 1415 1416
		per system is supported at this time.

			CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION
			Define the burst count bytes upper limit

1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423
		CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24
		Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support.

			CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C
			Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices.
			Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C.

1424 1425 1426 1427
			CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI
			Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices.
			Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI.

D
Dirk Eibach 已提交
1428 1429 1430
		CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI
		Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support.

1431
		CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC
1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439
		Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device
		per system is supported at this time.

			CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS
			Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped
			to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at
			0xfed40000.

1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453
		CONFIG_CMD_TPM
		Add tpm monitor functions.
		Requires CONFIG_TPM. If CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS is set, also
		provides monitor access to authorized functions.

		CONFIG_TPM
		Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides
		functional interfaces to some TPM commands.
		Requires support for a TPM device.

		CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS
		Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library.
		Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1.

W
wdenk 已提交
1454 1455
- USB Support:
		At the moment only the UHCI host controller is
W
wdenk 已提交
1456
		supported (PIP405, MIP405, MPC5200); define
W
wdenk 已提交
1457 1458
		CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it.
		define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard
W
wdenk 已提交
1459
		and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB
W
wdenk 已提交
1460 1461 1462 1463
		storage devices.
		Note:
		Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives
		(TEAC FD-05PUB).
W
wdenk 已提交
1464 1465 1466
		MPC5200 USB requires additional defines:
			CONFIG_USB_CLOCK
				for 528 MHz Clock: 0x0001bbbb
1467 1468
			CONFIG_PSC3_USB
				for USB on PSC3
W
wdenk 已提交
1469 1470 1471
			CONFIG_USB_CONFIG
				for differential drivers: 0x00001000
				for single ended drivers: 0x00005000
1472 1473
				for differential drivers on PSC3: 0x00000100
				for single ended drivers on PSC3: 0x00004100
1474
			CONFIG_SYS_USB_EVENT_POLL
Z
Zhang Wei 已提交
1475 1476
				May be defined to allow interrupt polling
				instead of using asynchronous interrupts
W
wdenk 已提交
1477

1478 1479 1480
		CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the
		txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset.

1481 1482 1483
		CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2
		HW module registers.

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1484 1485 1486 1487
- USB Device:
		Define the below if you wish to use the USB console.
		Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the
		command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
1488
		attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1489 1490
		it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty
		can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1491
		appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498
		Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device.
		If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate
		a Linux host by
		# modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID
		else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment
		variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following
		might be defined in YourBoardName.h
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1499

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505
			CONFIG_USB_DEVICE
			Define this to build a UDC device

			CONFIG_USB_TTY
			Define this to have a tty type of device available to
			talk to the UDC device
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1506

1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514
			CONFIG_USBD_HS
			Define this to enable the high speed support for usb
			device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine
			int is_usbd_high_speed(void)
			also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll
			whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full
			speed.

1515
			CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1516 1517 1518 1519
			Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to
			be set to usbtty.

			mpc8xx:
1520
				CONFIG_SYS_USB_EXTC_CLK 0xBLAH
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1521
				Derive USB clock from external clock "blah"
1522
				- CONFIG_SYS_USB_EXTC_CLK 0x02
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1523

1524
				CONFIG_SYS_USB_BRG_CLK 0xBLAH
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1525
				Derive USB clock from brgclk
1526
				- CONFIG_SYS_USB_BRG_CLK 0x04
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1527

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1528
		If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1529
		define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1530
		or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537
		CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME,
		CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot
		should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host.

			CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER
			Define this string as the name of your company for
			- CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company"
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1538

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547
			CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME
			Define this string as the name of your product
			- CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device"

			CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID
			Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB
			Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID
			to avoid polluting the USB namespace.
			- CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1548

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1549 1550 1551 1552
			CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID
			Define this as the unique Product ID
			for your device
			- CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF
W
wdenk 已提交
1553

1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561
- ULPI Layer Support:
		The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via
		the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY
		via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and
		the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based
		viewport is supported.
		To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and
		CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file.
L
Lucas Stach 已提交
1562 1563 1564
		If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the
		standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to
		the appropriate value in Hz.
W
wdenk 已提交
1565

1566
- MMC Support:
W
wdenk 已提交
1567 1568 1569
		The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To
		enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be
		accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device
1570
		to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is
1571 1572
		enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with
		the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT.
1573

1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582
		CONFIG_SH_MMCIF
		Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller

			CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR
			Define the base address of MMCIF registers

			CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK
			Define the clock frequency for MMCIF

1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592
		CONFIG_GENERIC_MMC
		Enable the generic MMC driver

		CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_BOOT
		Enable some additional features of the eMMC boot partitions.

		CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_RPMB
		Enable the commands for reading, writing and programming the
		key for the Replay Protection Memory Block partition in eMMC.

1593
- USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support:
1594
		CONFIG_USB_FUNCTION_DFU
1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605
		This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class

		CONFIG_CMD_DFU
		This enables the command "dfu" which is used to have
		U-Boot create a DFU class device via USB.  This command
		requires that the "dfu_alt_info" environment variable be
		set and define the alt settings to expose to the host.

		CONFIG_DFU_MMC
		This enables support for exposing (e)MMC devices via DFU.

1606 1607 1608
		CONFIG_DFU_NAND
		This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU.

A
Afzal Mohammed 已提交
1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614
		CONFIG_DFU_RAM
		This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU.
		Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but
		allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage,
		one that would help mostly the developer.

1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620
		CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE
		Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the
		raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer
		configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable
		through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable.

1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627
		CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE
		When updating files rather than the raw storage device,
		we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write
		the buffer once we've been given the whole file.  Define
		this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer.
		Default is 4 MiB if undefined.

1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637
		DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT
		Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the
		host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending
		a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device.

		DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT
		Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when
		entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before
		sending again an USB request to the device.

1638
- USB Device Android Fastboot support:
1639 1640 1641
		CONFIG_USB_FUNCTION_FASTBOOT
		This enables the USB part of the fastboot gadget

1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652
		CONFIG_CMD_FASTBOOT
		This enables the command "fastboot" which enables the Android
		fastboot mode for the platform's USB device. Fastboot is a USB
		protocol for downloading images, flashing and device control
		used on Android devices.
		See doc/README.android-fastboot for more information.

		CONFIG_ANDROID_BOOT_IMAGE
		This enables support for booting images which use the Android
		image format header.

1653
		CONFIG_FASTBOOT_BUF_ADDR
1654 1655 1656 1657
		The fastboot protocol requires a large memory buffer for
		downloads. Define this to the starting RAM address to use for
		downloaded images.

1658
		CONFIG_FASTBOOT_BUF_SIZE
1659 1660 1661
		The fastboot protocol requires a large memory buffer for
		downloads. This buffer should be as large as possible for a
		platform. Define this to the size available RAM for fastboot.
1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671

		CONFIG_FASTBOOT_FLASH
		The fastboot protocol includes a "flash" command for writing
		the downloaded image to a non-volatile storage device. Define
		this to enable the "fastboot flash" command.

		CONFIG_FASTBOOT_FLASH_MMC_DEV
		The fastboot "flash" command requires additional information
		regarding the non-volatile storage device. Define this to
		the eMMC device that fastboot should use to store the image.
1672

1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681
		CONFIG_FASTBOOT_GPT_NAME
		The fastboot "flash" command supports writing the downloaded
		image to the Protective MBR and the Primary GUID Partition
		Table. (Additionally, this downloaded image is post-processed
		to generate and write the Backup GUID Partition Table.)
		This occurs when the specified "partition name" on the
		"fastboot flash" command line matches this value.
		Default is GPT_ENTRY_NAME (currently "gpt") if undefined.

W
wdenk 已提交
1682 1683 1684 1685 1686
- Journaling Flash filesystem support:
		CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND, CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND_OFF, CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND_SIZE,
		CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND_DEV
		Define these for a default partition on a NAND device

1687 1688
		CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR,
		CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS
W
wdenk 已提交
1689 1690
		Define these for a default partition on a NOR device

1691
		CONFIG_SYS_JFFS_CUSTOM_PART
W
wdenk 已提交
1692 1693 1694 1695
		Define this to create an own partition. You have to provide a
		function struct part_info* jffs2_part_info(int part_num)

		If you define only one JFFS2 partition you may also want to
1696
		#define CONFIG_SYS_JFFS_SINGLE_PART	1
W
wdenk 已提交
1697 1698 1699
		to disable the command chpart. This is the default when you
		have not defined a custom partition

D
Donggeun Kim 已提交
1700 1701
- FAT(File Allocation Table) filesystem write function support:
		CONFIG_FAT_WRITE
D
Donggeun Kim 已提交
1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707

		Define this to enable support for saving memory data as a
		file in FAT formatted partition.

		This will also enable the command "fatwrite" enabling the
		user to write files to FAT.
D
Donggeun Kim 已提交
1708

1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715
CBFS (Coreboot Filesystem) support
		CONFIG_CMD_CBFS

		Define this to enable support for reading from a Coreboot
		filesystem. Available commands are cbfsinit, cbfsinfo, cbfsls
		and cbfsload.

1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721
- FAT(File Allocation Table) filesystem cluster size:
		CONFIG_FS_FAT_MAX_CLUSTSIZE

		Define the max cluster size for fat operations else
		a default value of 65536 will be defined.

W
wdenk 已提交
1722
- Keyboard Support:
1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731
		See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers.

		CONFIG_KEYBOARD

		Define this to enable a custom keyboard support.
		This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be
		defined in your board-specific files. This option is deprecated
		and is only used by novena. For new boards, use driver model
		instead.
W
wdenk 已提交
1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743

- Video support:
		CONFIG_VIDEO

		Define this to enable video support (for output to
		video).

		CONFIG_VIDEO_CT69000

		Enable Chips & Technologies 69000 Video chip

		CONFIG_VIDEO_SMI_LYNXEM
W
wdenk 已提交
1744
		Enable Silicon Motion SMI 712/710/810 Video chip. The
W
wdenk 已提交
1745 1746 1747 1748
		video output is selected via environment 'videoout'
		(1 = LCD and 2 = CRT). If videoout is undefined, CRT is
		assumed.

W
wdenk 已提交
1749
		For the CT69000 and SMI_LYNXEM drivers, videomode is
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
1750
		selected via environment 'videomode'. Two different ways
W
wdenk 已提交
1751 1752
		are possible:
		- "videomode=num"   'num' is a standard LiLo mode numbers.
W
wdenk 已提交
1753
		Following standard modes are supported	(* is default):
W
wdenk 已提交
1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761

		      Colors	640x480 800x600 1024x768 1152x864 1280x1024
		-------------+---------------------------------------------
		      8 bits |	0x301*	0x303	 0x305	  0x161	    0x307
		     15 bits |	0x310	0x313	 0x316	  0x162	    0x319
		     16 bits |	0x311	0x314	 0x317	  0x163	    0x31A
		     24 bits |	0x312	0x315	 0x318	    ?	    0x31B
		-------------+---------------------------------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
1762 1763
		(i.e. setenv videomode 317; saveenv; reset;)

W
wdenk 已提交
1764
		- "videomode=bootargs" all the video parameters are parsed
1765
		from the bootargs. (See drivers/video/videomodes.c)
W
wdenk 已提交
1766 1767


1768
		CONFIG_VIDEO_SED13806
W
wdenk 已提交
1769
		Enable Epson SED13806 driver. This driver supports 8bpp
1770 1771 1772
		and 16bpp modes defined by CONFIG_VIDEO_SED13806_8BPP
		or CONFIG_VIDEO_SED13806_16BPP

1773
		CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
1774
		Enable the Freescale DIU video driver.	Reference boards for
1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786
		SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU
		support, and should also define these other macros:

			CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR
			CONFIG_VIDEO
			CONFIG_CMD_BMP
			CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE
			CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR
			CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE
			CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO
			CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO

1787 1788
		The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment
		variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during
1789
		boot.  See the documentation file doc/README.video for a
1790
		description of this variable.
1791

W
wdenk 已提交
1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797
- LCD Support:	CONFIG_LCD

		Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD
		display); also select one of the supported displays
		by defining one of these:

S
Stelian Pop 已提交
1798 1799 1800 1801
		CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD:

			HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320.

W
wdenk 已提交
1802
		CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33:
W
wdenk 已提交
1803

W
wdenk 已提交
1804
			NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan.
W
wdenk 已提交
1805

W
wdenk 已提交
1806
		CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20
W
wdenk 已提交
1807

W
wdenk 已提交
1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813
			NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480.
			Active, color, single scan.

		CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54

			NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480.
W
wdenk 已提交
1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841
			Active, color, single scan.

		CONFIG_SHARP_16x9

			Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan.
			It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is.

		CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341

			Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480.
			Active, color, single scan.

		CONFIG_HLD1045

			HLD1045 display, 640x480.
			Active, color, single scan.

		CONFIG_OPTREX_BW

			Optrex	 CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5
			or
			Hitachi	 LMG6912RPFC-00T
			or
			Hitachi	 SP14Q002

			320x240. Black & white.

		Normally display is black on white background; define
1842
		CONFIG_SYS_WHITE_ON_BLACK to get it inverted.
W
wdenk 已提交
1843

1844 1845
		CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT

1846
		Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is
1847 1848 1849 1850 1851
		defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead.
		For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE
		here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on
		a per-section basis.

1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857
		CONFIG_CONSOLE_SCROLL_LINES

		When the console need to be scrolled, this is the number of
		lines to scroll by. It defaults to 1. Increasing this makes
		the console jump but can help speed up operation when scrolling
		is slow.
1858

1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878
		CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION

		Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait
		mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree,
		we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the
		framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are
		printed out.
		Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be
		initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of
		"vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code.
		The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to
		fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline):
		0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree
		1 = 90 degree rotation
		2 = 180 degree rotation
		3 = 270 degree rotation

		If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be
		initialized with 0degree rotation.

1879 1880 1881 1882
		CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8

		Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD.

1883 1884 1885 1886 1887
		CONFIG_I2C_EDID

		Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID
		information over I2C from an attached LCD display.

W
wdenk 已提交
1888
- Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN
1889

W
wdenk 已提交
1890 1891 1892
		If this option is set, the environment is checked for
		a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display
		of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD
1893
		is suppressed and the BMP image at the address
W
wdenk 已提交
1894 1895 1896 1897
		specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The
		console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This
		allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is
		loaded very quickly after power-on.
1898

1899 1900 1901 1902
		CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD

		If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment
		variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address
1903
		(see doc/README.displaying-bmps).
1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909
		This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment
		restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data
		abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned
		accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them)
		there is no need to set this option.

1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929
		CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN

		If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned
		on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the
		position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as
		number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it
		is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also
		specify 'm' for centering the image.

		Example:
		setenv splashpos m,m
			=> image at center of screen

		setenv splashpos 30,20
			=> image at x = 30 and y = 20

		setenv splashpos -10,m
			=> vertically centered image
			   at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9

S
Stefan Roese 已提交
1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935
- Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP

		If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP
		images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the
		splashscreen support or the bmp command.

1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941
- Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8

		If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images
		can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the
		bmp command.

1942
- Do compressing for memory range:
L
Lei Wen 已提交
1943 1944 1945 1946 1947
		CONFIG_CMD_ZIP

		If this option is set, it would use zlib deflate method
		to compress the specified memory at its best effort.

W
wdenk 已提交
1948
- Compression support:
1949 1950 1951 1952
		CONFIG_GZIP

		Enabled by default to support gzip compressed images.

W
wdenk 已提交
1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958
		CONFIG_BZIP2

		If this option is set, support for bzip2 compressed
		images is included. If not, only uncompressed and gzip
		compressed images are supported.

W
wdenk 已提交
1959
		NOTE: the bzip2 algorithm requires a lot of RAM, so
1960
		the malloc area (as defined by CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN) should
W
wdenk 已提交
1961
		be at least 4MB.
1962

1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983
		CONFIG_LZMA

		If this option is set, support for lzma compressed
		images is included.

		Note: The LZMA algorithm adds between 2 and 4KB of code and it
		requires an amount of dynamic memory that is given by the
		formula:

			(1846 + 768 << (lc + lp)) * sizeof(uint16)

		Where lc and lp stand for, respectively, Literal context bits
		and Literal pos bits.

		This value is upper-bounded by 14MB in the worst case. Anyway,
		for a ~4MB large kernel image, we have lc=3 and lp=0 for a
		total amount of (1846 + 768 << (3 + 0)) * 2 = ~41KB... that is
		a very small buffer.

		Use the lzmainfo tool to determinate the lc and lp values and
		then calculate the amount of needed dynamic memory (ensuring
1984
		the appropriate CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN value).
1985

1986 1987 1988 1989 1990
		CONFIG_LZO

		If this option is set, support for LZO compressed images
		is included.

W
wdenk 已提交
1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002
- MII/PHY support:
		CONFIG_PHY_ADDR

		The address of PHY on MII bus.

		CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx)

		The clock frequency of the MII bus

		CONFIG_PHY_GIGE

		If this option is set, support for speed/duplex
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2003
		detection of gigabit PHY is included.
W
wdenk 已提交
2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016

		CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY

		Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
		reset before any MII register access is possible.
		For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay
		required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A)

		CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx)

		Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
		command issued before MII status register can be read

W
wdenk 已提交
2017 2018 2019 2020
- IP address:
		CONFIG_IPADDR

		Define a default value for the IP address to use for
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2021
		the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not
W
wdenk 已提交
2022
		determined through e.g. bootp.
2023
		(Environment variable "ipaddr")
W
wdenk 已提交
2024 2025 2026 2027

- Server IP address:
		CONFIG_SERVERIP

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2028
		Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP
W
wdenk 已提交
2029
		server to contact when using the "tftboot" command.
2030
		(Environment variable "serverip")
W
wdenk 已提交
2031

2032 2033 2034 2035 2036
		CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR

		Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr'
		for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option)

2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053
- Gateway IP address:
		CONFIG_GATEWAYIP

		Defines a default value for the IP address of the
		default router where packets to other networks are
		sent to.
		(Environment variable "gatewayip")

- Subnet mask:
		CONFIG_NETMASK

		Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or
		routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP
		address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be
		forwarded through a router.
		(Environment variable "netmask")

D
David Updegraff 已提交
2054 2055 2056 2057 2058
- Multicast TFTP Mode:
		CONFIG_MCAST_TFTP

		Defines whether you want to support multicast TFTP as per
		rfc-2090; for example to work with atftp.  Lets lots of targets
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2059
		tftp down the same boot image concurrently.  Note: the Ethernet
D
David Updegraff 已提交
2060 2061 2062
		driver in use must provide a function: mcast() to join/leave a
		multicast group.

W
wdenk 已提交
2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073
- BOOTP Recovery Mode:
		CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY

		If you have many targets in a network that try to
		boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all
		systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same
		moment (which would happen for instance at recovery
		from a power failure, when all systems will try to
		boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining
		CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be
		inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The
2074
		following delays are inserted then:
W
wdenk 已提交
2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081

		1st BOOTP request:	delay 0 ... 1 sec
		2nd BOOTP request:	delay 0 ... 2 sec
		3rd BOOTP request:	delay 0 ... 4 sec
		4th and following
		BOOTP requests:		delay 0 ... 8 sec

2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099
		CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE

		BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The
		server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and
		U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of
		an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses
		aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP
		ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to
		respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it
		takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that
		time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order
		to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these
		retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of
		IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this
		cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding
		requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers
		from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency.

2100
- DHCP Advanced Options:
2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115
		You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining
		CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols:

		CONFIG_BOOTP_SUBNETMASK
		CONFIG_BOOTP_GATEWAY
		CONFIG_BOOTP_HOSTNAME
		CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN
		CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTPATH
		CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE
		CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS
		CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2
		CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME
		CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER
		CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET
		CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX
2116
		CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL
2117

W
Wilson Callan 已提交
2118 2119
		CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip
		environment variable, not the BOOTP server.
2120

2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126
		CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found
		after the configured retry count, the call will fail
		instead of starting over.  This can be used to fail over
		to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server
		is not available.

2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133
		CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 - If a DHCP client requests the DNS
		serverip from a DHCP server, it is possible that more
		than one DNS serverip is offered to the client.
		If CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 is enabled, the secondary DNS
		serverip will be stored in the additional environment
		variable "dnsip2". The first DNS serverip is always
		stored in the variable "dnsip", when CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS
2134
		is defined.
2135 2136 2137 2138

		CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME - Some DHCP servers are capable
		to do a dynamic update of a DNS server. To do this, they
		need the hostname of the DHCP requester.
W
Wilson Callan 已提交
2139
		If CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME is defined, the content
2140 2141
		of the "hostname" environment variable is passed as
		option 12 to the DHCP server.
2142

2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156
		CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY

		A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between
		receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request".
		This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't
		respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an
		AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed
		to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003
		DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at
		least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope
		that one of the retries will be successful but note that
		the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than
		this delay.

2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164
 - Link-local IP address negotiation:
		Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network
		for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration.
		This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed
		to exist in all environments that the device must operate.

		See doc/README.link-local for more information.

2165
 - CDP Options:
W
wdenk 已提交
2166
		CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID
2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178

		The device id used in CDP trigger frames.

		CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX

		A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address
		of the device.

		CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID

		A printf format string which contains the ascii name of
		the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2179
		eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc.
2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206

		CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES

		A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities;
		0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards.

		CONFIG_CDP_VERSION

		An ascii string containing the version of the software.

		CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM

		An ascii string containing the name of the platform.

		CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER

		A 32bit integer sent on the trigger.

		CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION

		A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the
		device in .1 of milliwatts.

		CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE

		A byte containing the id of the VLAN.

W
wdenk 已提交
2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217
- Status LED:	CONFIG_STATUS_LED

		Several configurations allow to display the current
		status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink
		fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as
		soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and
		start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running
		(supported by a status LED driver in the Linux
		kernel). Defining CONFIG_STATUS_LED enables this
		feature in U-Boot.

2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225
		Additional options:

		CONFIG_GPIO_LED
		The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin.
		In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a
		status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_GPIO_LED
		to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary.

2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232
		CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE
		Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which
		case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and
		GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state.
		In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined
		with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity.

W
wdenk 已提交
2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238
- CAN Support:	CONFIG_CAN_DRIVER

		Defining CONFIG_CAN_DRIVER enables CAN driver support
		on those systems that support this (optional)
		feature, like the TQM8xxL modules.

2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248
- I2C Support:	CONFIG_SYS_I2C

		This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use
		i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set
		CONFIG_CMD_I2C in CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c
		based realtime clock chips or other i2c devices. See
		common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the command line
		interface.

		ported i2c driver to the new framework:
2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261
		- drivers/i2c/soft_i2c.c:
		  - activate first bus with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT define
		    CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE
		    for defining speed and slave address
		  - activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define
		    CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2
		    for defining speed and slave address
		  - activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define
		    CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3
		    for defining speed and slave address
		  - activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define
		    CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4
		    for defining speed and slave address
2262

2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268
		- drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c:
		  - activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL
		    define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register
		    offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and
		    CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first
		    bus.
2269
		  - If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define
2270 2271 2272 2273 2274
		    CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset
		    CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and
		    CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the
		    second bus.

2275
		- drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c:
N
Nobuhiro Iwamatsu 已提交
2276 2277 2278
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA
		  - This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from
		    100000 and the slave addr 0!
2279

2280 2281 2282 2283 2284
		- drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1

T
trem 已提交
2285 2286
		- drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC
2287 2288 2289 2290
		  - enable bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C1
		  - enable bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C2
		  - enable bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C3
		  - enable bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C4
T
trem 已提交
2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296
		  - define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED
		  - define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE
		  - define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED
		  - define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE
		  - define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED
		  - define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE
2297 2298
		  - define speed for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SPEED
		  - define slave for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SLAVE
2299
		If those defines are not set, default value is 100000
T
trem 已提交
2300 2301
		for speed, and 0 for slave.

2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315
		- drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c:
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR
		  - This driver adds 4 i2c buses

		  - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_BASE for setting the register channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_SPEED for for the speed channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_BASE for setting the register channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_SPEED for for the speed channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_BASE for setting the register channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_SPEED for for the speed channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_BASE for setting the register channel 3
		  - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_SPEED for for the speed channel 3
		  - CONFIF_SYS_RCAR_I2C_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses

2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331
		- drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c:
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH
		  - This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses

		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE5 for setting the register channel 5
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED5 for for the speed channel 5
2332
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses
2333

2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346
		- drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4
		  - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4

2347 2348 2349 2350 2351
		- drivers/i2c/zynq_i2c.c
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ
		  - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SPEED for speed setting
		  - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SLAVE for slave addr

2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357
		- drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c:
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0
		  - This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420
		    9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung)
		    with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0!

D
Dirk Eibach 已提交
2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371
		- drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c
		  - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3
D
Dirk Eibach 已提交
2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380
		  - activate dual channel with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_DUAL
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0_1 speed channel 0_1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0_1 slave addr channel 0_1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1_1 speed channel 1_1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1_1 slave addr channel 1_1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2_1 speed channel 2_1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2_1 slave addr channel 2_1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3_1 speed channel 3_1
		  - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3_1 slave addr channel 3_1
D
Dirk Eibach 已提交
2381

2382 2383 2384
		additional defines:

		CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES
2385
		Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use. If you
2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400
		don't use/have i2c muxes on your i2c bus, this
		is equal to CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_ADAPTERS, and you can
		omit this define.

		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS
		define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware.
		if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can
		omit this define.

		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS
		define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected
		on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this
		define.

		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES
2401
		hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if
2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418
		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example
		a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and
		CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9:

		 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES	{{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
					{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \
					{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \
					{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \
					{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \
					{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \
					{1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
					{1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \
					{1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \
					}

		which defines
			bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux
2419 2420 2421 2422 2423
			bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1
			bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2
			bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3
			bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4
			bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5
2424
			bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux
2425 2426
			bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1
			bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2
2427 2428 2429

		If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define.

2430
- Legacy I2C Support:	CONFIG_HARD_I2C
2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440

		NOTE: It is intended to move drivers to CONFIG_SYS_I2C which
		provides the following compelling advantages:

		- more than one i2c adapter is usable
		- approved multibus support
		- better i2c mux support

		** Please consider updating your I2C driver now. **

2441 2442 2443
		These enable legacy I2C serial bus commands. Defining
		CONFIG_HARD_I2C will include the appropriate I2C driver
		for the selected CPU.
W
wdenk 已提交
2444

2445
		This will allow you to use i2c commands at the u-boot
2446
		command line (as long as you set CONFIG_CMD_I2C in
W
wdenk 已提交
2447 2448
		CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c based realtime
		clock chips. See common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the
W
wdenk 已提交
2449
		command line interface.
W
wdenk 已提交
2450

B
Ben Warren 已提交
2451
		CONFIG_HARD_I2C selects a hardware I2C controller.
W
wdenk 已提交
2452

2453
		There are several other quantities that must also be
2454
		defined when you define CONFIG_HARD_I2C.
W
wdenk 已提交
2455

2456
		In both cases you will need to define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SPEED
2457
		to be the frequency (in Hz) at which you wish your i2c bus
2458
		to run and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SLAVE to be the address of this node (ie
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2459
		the CPU's i2c node address).
2460

2461
		Now, the u-boot i2c code for the mpc8xx
S
Stefan Roese 已提交
2462
		(arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/i2c.c) sets the CPU up as a master node
2463 2464 2465
		and so its address should therefore be cleared to 0 (See,
		eg, MPC823e User's Manual p.16-473). So, set
		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SLAVE to 0.
W
wdenk 已提交
2466

2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473
		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_MPC5XXX

		When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer
		chips might think that the current transfer is still
		in progress.  Reset the slave devices by sending start
		commands until the slave device responds.

2474
		That's all that's required for CONFIG_HARD_I2C.
W
wdenk 已提交
2475

2476
		If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT)
W
wdenk 已提交
2477 2478
		then the following macros need to be defined (examples are
		from include/configs/lwmon.h):
W
wdenk 已提交
2479 2480 2481

		I2C_INIT

W
wdenk 已提交
2482
		(Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C
W
wdenk 已提交
2483
		controller or configure ports.
W
wdenk 已提交
2484

W
wdenk 已提交
2485
		eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |=	PB_SCL)
W
wdenk 已提交
2486

W
wdenk 已提交
2487 2488
		I2C_PORT

W
wdenk 已提交
2489 2490 2491
		(Only for MPC8260 CPU). The I/O port to use (the code
		assumes both bits are on the same port). Valid values
		are 0..3 for ports A..D.
W
wdenk 已提交
2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498

		I2C_ACTIVE

		The code necessary to make the I2C data line active
		(driven).  If the data line is open collector, this
		define can be null.

W
wdenk 已提交
2499 2500
		eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |=  PB_SDA)

W
wdenk 已提交
2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506
		I2C_TRISTATE

		The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated
		(inactive).  If the data line is open collector, this
		define can be null.

W
wdenk 已提交
2507 2508
		eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA)

W
wdenk 已提交
2509 2510
		I2C_READ

Y
York Sun 已提交
2511 2512
		Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high,
		false if it is low.
W
wdenk 已提交
2513

W
wdenk 已提交
2514 2515
		eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0)

W
wdenk 已提交
2516 2517
		I2C_SDA(bit)

Y
York Sun 已提交
2518 2519
		If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it
		is false, it clears it (low).
W
wdenk 已提交
2520

W
wdenk 已提交
2521
		eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \
W
wdenk 已提交
2522
			if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |=  PB_SDA; \
W
wdenk 已提交
2523
			else	immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA
W
wdenk 已提交
2524

W
wdenk 已提交
2525 2526
		I2C_SCL(bit)

Y
York Sun 已提交
2527 2528
		If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it
		is false, it clears it (low).
W
wdenk 已提交
2529

W
wdenk 已提交
2530
		eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \
W
wdenk 已提交
2531
			if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |=  PB_SCL; \
W
wdenk 已提交
2532
			else	immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL
W
wdenk 已提交
2533

W
wdenk 已提交
2534 2535 2536 2537
		I2C_DELAY

		This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this
		controls the rate of data transfer.  The data rate thus
W
wdenk 已提交
2538
		is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something
2539 2540
		like:

W
wdenk 已提交
2541
		#define I2C_DELAY  udelay(2)
W
wdenk 已提交
2542

2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552
		CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA

		If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h),
		then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be
		used as SCL / SDA.  Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will
		have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate.

		You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to
		the generic GPIO functions.

2553
		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD
2554

W
wdenk 已提交
2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562
		When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer
		chips might think that the current transfer is still
		in progress. On some boards it is possible to access
		the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the
		processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin
		connected to the bus. If this option is defined a
		custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c
		is run early in the boot sequence.
2563

2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574
		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BOARD_LATE_INIT

		An alternative to CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD. If this option is
		defined a custom i2c_board_late_init() routine in
		boards/xxx/board.c is run AFTER the operations in i2c_init()
		is completed. This callpoint can be used to unreset i2c bus
		using CPU i2c controller register accesses for CPUs whose i2c
		controller provide such a method. It is called at the end of
		i2c_init() to allow i2c_init operations to setup the i2c bus
		controller on the CPU (e.g. setting bus speed & slave address).

W
wdenk 已提交
2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580
		CONFIG_I2CFAST (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only)

		This option enables configuration of bi_iic_fast[] flags
		in u-boot bd_info structure based on u-boot environment
		variable "i2cfast". (see also i2cfast)

B
Ben Warren 已提交
2581 2582 2583
		CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS

		This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
2584 2585
		must have a controller.	 At any point in time, only one bus is
		active.	 To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command.
B
Ben Warren 已提交
2586 2587
		Note that bus numbering is zero-based.

2588
		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES
B
Ben Warren 已提交
2589 2590

		This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
2591
		when the 'i2c probe' command is issued.	 If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
2592 2593
		is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs.  Otherwise, specify
		a 1D array of device addresses
B
Ben Warren 已提交
2594 2595 2596

		e.g.
			#undef	CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
2597
			#define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68}
B
Ben Warren 已提交
2598 2599 2600

		will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
2601
			#define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
2602
			#define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MULTI_NOPROBES	{{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}}
B
Ben Warren 已提交
2603 2604 2605

		will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1

2606
		CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
T
Timur Tabi 已提交
2607 2608 2609 2610

		If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD.
		If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0.

2611
		CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM
2612 2613 2614 2615

		If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC.
		If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0.

2616
		CONFIG_SYS_DTT_BUS_NUM
2617 2618 2619 2620

		If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the DTT.
		If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that DTT is on I2C bus 0.

2621
		CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DTT_ADDR:
2622 2623 2624 2625 2626

		If defined, specifies the I2C address of the DTT device.
		If not defined, then U-Boot uses predefined value for
		specified DTT device.

2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635
		CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START

		defining this will force the i2c_read() function in
		the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start
		between writing the address pointer and reading the
		data.  If this define is omitted the default behaviour
		of doing a stop-start sequence will be used.  Most I2C
		devices can use either method, but some require one or
		the other.
T
Timur Tabi 已提交
2636

W
wdenk 已提交
2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642
- SPI Support:	CONFIG_SPI

		Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with
		SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and
		D/As on the SACSng board)

2643 2644 2645 2646 2647
		CONFIG_SH_SPI

		Enables the driver for SPI controller on SuperH. Currently
		only SH7757 is supported.

W
wdenk 已提交
2648 2649
		CONFIG_SOFT_SPI

W
wdenk 已提交
2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656
		Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than
		using hardware support. This is a general purpose
		driver that only requires three general I/O port pins
		(two outputs, one input) to function. If this is
		defined, the board configuration must define several
		SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For
		an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h.
W
wdenk 已提交
2657

2658 2659 2660 2661 2662
		CONFIG_HARD_SPI

		Enables a hardware SPI driver for general-purpose reads
		and writes.  As with CONFIG_SOFT_SPI, the board configuration
		must define a list of chip-select function pointers.
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
2663
		Currently supported on some MPC8xxx processors.	 For an
2664 2665
		example, see include/configs/mpc8349emds.h.

G
Guennadi Liakhovetski 已提交
2666 2667 2668
		CONFIG_MXC_SPI

		Enables the driver for the SPI controllers on i.MX and MXC
2669
		SoCs. Currently i.MX31/35/51 are supported.
G
Guennadi Liakhovetski 已提交
2670

2671 2672 2673 2674
		CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT
		Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed.
		default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100)     /* 10 ms */

2675
- FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA
W
wdenk 已提交
2676

2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682
		Enables FPGA subsystem.

		CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor>

		Enables support for specific chip vendors.
		(ALTERA, XILINX)
W
wdenk 已提交
2683

2684
		CONFIG_FPGA_<family>
W
wdenk 已提交
2685

2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691
		Enables support for FPGA family.
		(SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX)

		CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT

		Specify the number of FPGA devices to support.
W
wdenk 已提交
2692

2693 2694 2695 2696
		CONFIG_CMD_FPGA_LOADMK

		Enable support for fpga loadmk command

2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705
		CONFIG_CMD_FPGA_LOADP

		Enable support for fpga loadp command - load partial bitstream

		CONFIG_CMD_FPGA_LOADBP

		Enable support for fpga loadbp command - load partial bitstream
		(Xilinx only)

2706
		CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK
W
wdenk 已提交
2707

W
wdenk 已提交
2708
		Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration.
W
wdenk 已提交
2709

2710
		CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY
W
wdenk 已提交
2711

W
wdenk 已提交
2712 2713 2714 2715
		Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy
		status by the configuration function. This option
		will require a board or device specific function to
		be written.
W
wdenk 已提交
2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721

		CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY

		If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA
		configuration driver.

2722
		CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC
W
wdenk 已提交
2723 2724
		Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration

2725
		CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR
W
wdenk 已提交
2726

W
wdenk 已提交
2727 2728 2729 2730
		Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile
		loading. For example, abort during Virtex II
		configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which
		indicated a CRC error).
W
wdenk 已提交
2731

2732
		CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT
W
wdenk 已提交
2733

2734 2735
		Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert
		after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II
W
wdenk 已提交
2736
		FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2737
		ms.
W
wdenk 已提交
2738

2739
		CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY
W
wdenk 已提交
2740

2741
		Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2742
		Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms.
W
wdenk 已提交
2743

2744
		CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG
W
wdenk 已提交
2745

W
wdenk 已提交
2746
		Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2747
		200 ms.
W
wdenk 已提交
2748 2749

- Configuration Management:
2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757
		CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET

		Some SoCs need special image types (e.g. U-Boot binary
		with a special header) as build targets. By defining
		CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET in the SoC / board header, this
		special image will be automatically built upon calling
		make / MAKEALL.

W
wdenk 已提交
2758 2759
		CONFIG_IDENT_STRING

W
wdenk 已提交
2760 2761
		If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot
		version information (U_BOOT_VERSION)
W
wdenk 已提交
2762 2763 2764

- Vendor Parameter Protection:

W
wdenk 已提交
2765 2766
		U-Boot considers the values of the environment
		variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and
W
wdenk 已提交
2767
		"ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that
W
wdenk 已提交
2768 2769 2770 2771
		are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and
		protects these variables from casual modification by
		the user. Once set, these variables are read-only,
		and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2772
		change this behaviour:
W
wdenk 已提交
2773 2774 2775

		If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config
		file, the write protection for vendor parameters is
2776
		completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete
W
wdenk 已提交
2777 2778
		these parameters.

2779 2780
		Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the
		default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2781
		Ethernet address is installed in the environment,
W
wdenk 已提交
2782 2783 2784 2785
		which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The
		serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains
		read-only.]

2786 2787 2788 2789 2790
		The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way
		for any variable by configuring the type of access
		to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable
		or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC.

W
wdenk 已提交
2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806
- Protected RAM:
		CONFIG_PRAM

		Define this variable to enable the reservation of
		"protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten
		by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of
		kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite
		this default value by defining an environment
		variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to
		reserve. Note that the board info structure will
		still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is
		reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will
		automatically be defined to hold the amount of
		remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot
		argument to Linux, for instance like that:

2807
			setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem}
W
wdenk 已提交
2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819
			saveenv

		This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory,
		either, which results in a memory region that will
		not be affected by reboots.

		*WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic
		detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that
		this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the
		following board configurations are known to be
		"pRAM-clean":

2820 2821
			IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx, TQM8xxL,
			HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON,
2822
			FLAGADM, TQM8260
W
wdenk 已提交
2823

2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831
- Access to physical memory region (> 4GB)
		Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not
		normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures
		support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit
		machines using physical address extension or similar.
		Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which
		currently only supports clearing the memory.

W
wdenk 已提交
2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837
- Error Recovery:
		CONFIG_PANIC_HANG

		Define this variable to stop the system in case of a
		fatal error, so that you have to reset it manually.
		This is probably NOT a good idea for an embedded
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2838
		system where you want the system to reboot
W
wdenk 已提交
2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844
		automatically as fast as possible, but it may be
		useful during development since you can try to debug
		the conditions that lead to the situation.

		CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT

W
wdenk 已提交
2845 2846 2847 2848
		This variable defines the number of retries for
		network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP
		before giving up the operation. If not defined, a
		default value of 5 is used.
W
wdenk 已提交
2849

2850 2851 2852 2853
		CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT

		Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds.

2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860
		CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT

		Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol.
		If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command,
		try longer timeout such as
		#define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL

W
wdenk 已提交
2861
- Command Interpreter:
2862
		CONFIG_AUTO_COMPLETE
2863 2864 2865

		Enable auto completion of commands using TAB.

2866
		CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2
W
wdenk 已提交
2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873

		This defines the secondary prompt string, which is
		printed when the command interpreter needs more input
		to complete a command. Usually "> ".

	Note:

W
wdenk 已提交
2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880
		In the current implementation, the local variables
		space and global environment variables space are
		separated. Local variables are those you define by
		simply typing `name=value'. To access a local
		variable later on, you have write `$name' or
		`${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable
		directly type `$name' at the command prompt.
W
wdenk 已提交
2881

W
wdenk 已提交
2882 2883 2884 2885
		Global environment variables are those you use
		setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored
		in such a variable, you need to use the run command,
		and you must not use the '$' sign to access them.
W
wdenk 已提交
2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892

		To store commands and special characters in a
		variable, please use double quotation marks
		surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead
		of the backslashes before semicolons and special
		symbols.

2893
- Command Line Editing and History:
2894 2895
		CONFIG_CMDLINE_EDITING

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
2896
		Enable editing and History functions for interactive
2897
		command line input operations
2898

2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906
- Command Line PS1/PS2 support:
		CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT

		Enable support for changing the command prompt string
		at run-time. Only static string is supported so far.
		The string is obtained from environment variables PS1
		and PS2.

W
wdenk 已提交
2907
- Default Environment:
W
wdenk 已提交
2908 2909
		CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS

W
wdenk 已提交
2910 2911
		Define this to contain any number of null terminated
		strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of
W
wdenk 已提交
2912
		the default environment compiled into the boot image.
W
wdenk 已提交
2913

W
wdenk 已提交
2914 2915
		For example, place something like this in your
		board's config file:
W
wdenk 已提交
2916 2917 2918 2919 2920

		#define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \
			"myvar1=value1\0" \
			"myvar2=value2\0"

W
wdenk 已提交
2921 2922 2923 2924
		Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the
		internal format how the environment is stored by the
		U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported
		interface! Although it is unlikely that this format
W
wdenk 已提交
2925
		will change soon, there is no guarantee either.
W
wdenk 已提交
2926 2927
		You better know what you are doing here.

W
wdenk 已提交
2928 2929
		Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is
		discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset
2930
		the environment like the "source" command or the
W
wdenk 已提交
2931
		boot command first.
W
wdenk 已提交
2932

2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946
		CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_CONFIG

		Define this in order to add variables describing the
		U-Boot build configuration to the default environment.
		These will be named arch, cpu, board, vendor, and soc.

		Enabling this option will cause the following to be defined:

		- CONFIG_SYS_ARCH
		- CONFIG_SYS_CPU
		- CONFIG_SYS_BOARD
		- CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR
		- CONFIG_SYS_SOC

2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952
		CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_RUNTIME_CONFIG

		Define this in order to add variables describing certain
		run-time determined information about the hardware to the
		environment.  These will be named board_name, board_rev.

2953 2954 2955
		CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT

		Normally the environment is loaded when the board is
2956
		initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits
2957 2958 2959 2960 2961
		that so that the environment is not available until
		explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
		this is instead controlled by the value of
		/config/load-environment.

2962 2963 2964
- Parallel Flash support:
		CONFIG_SYS_NO_FLASH

B
Bin Meng 已提交
2965
		Traditionally U-Boot was run on systems with parallel NOR
2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974
		flash. This option is used to disable support for parallel NOR
		flash. This option should be defined if the board does not have
		parallel flash.

		If this option is not defined one of the generic flash drivers
		(e.g.  CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER or CONFIG_ST_SMI) must be
		selected or the board must provide an implementation of the
		flash API (see include/flash.h).

W
wdenk 已提交
2975
- DataFlash Support:
2976 2977
		CONFIG_HAS_DATAFLASH

W
wdenk 已提交
2978 2979 2980
		Defining this option enables DataFlash features and
		allows to read/write in Dataflash via the standard
		commands cp, md...
2981

2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000
- Serial Flash support
		CONFIG_CMD_SF

		Defining this option enables SPI flash commands
		'sf probe/read/write/erase/update'.

		Usage requires an initial 'probe' to define the serial
		flash parameters, followed by read/write/erase/update
		commands.

		The following defaults may be provided by the platform
		to handle the common case when only a single serial
		flash is present on the system.

		CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_BUS		Bus identifier
		CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_CS		Chip-select
		CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_MODE 		(see include/spi.h)
		CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_SPEED		in Hz

S
Simon Glass 已提交
3001 3002 3003 3004 3005
		CONFIG_CMD_SF_TEST

		Define this option to include a destructive SPI flash
		test ('sf test').

3006 3007 3008 3009
		CONFIG_SF_DUAL_FLASH		Dual flash memories

		Define this option to use dual flash support where two flash
		memories can be connected with a given cs line.
3010
		Currently Xilinx Zynq qspi supports these type of connections.
3011

W
wdenk 已提交
3012 3013 3014 3015 3016
- SystemACE Support:
		CONFIG_SYSTEMACE

		Adding this option adds support for Xilinx SystemACE
		chips attached via some sort of local bus. The address
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3017
		of the chip must also be defined in the
3018
		CONFIG_SYS_SYSTEMACE_BASE macro. For example:
W
wdenk 已提交
3019 3020

		#define CONFIG_SYSTEMACE
3021
		#define CONFIG_SYS_SYSTEMACE_BASE 0xf0000000
W
wdenk 已提交
3022 3023 3024 3025

		When SystemACE support is added, the "ace" device type
		becomes available to the fat commands, i.e. fatls.

3026 3027 3028
- TFTP Fixed UDP Port:
		CONFIG_TFTP_PORT

3029
		If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp
3030
		is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value.
3031
		If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port
3032 3033
		number generator is used.

3034 3035 3036 3037 3038
		Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply
		the TFTP UDP destination port value.  If tftpdstp isn't
		defined, the normal port 69 is used.

		The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to
3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045
		blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured
		target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of
		"punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing
		the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally.
		A better solution is to properly configure the firewall,
		but sometimes that is not allowed.

3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056
- Hashing support:
		CONFIG_CMD_HASH

		This enables a generic 'hash' command which can produce
		hashes / digests from a few algorithms (e.g. SHA1, SHA256).

		CONFIG_HASH_VERIFY

		Enable the hash verify command (hash -v). This adds to code
		size a little.

3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068
		CONFIG_SHA1 - This option enables support of hashing using SHA1
		algorithm. The hash is calculated in software.
		CONFIG_SHA256 - This option enables support of hashing using
		SHA256 algorithm. The hash is calculated in software.
		CONFIG_SHA_HW_ACCEL - This option enables hardware acceleration
		for SHA1/SHA256 hashing.
		This affects the 'hash' command and also the
		hash_lookup_algo() function.
		CONFIG_SHA_PROG_HW_ACCEL - This option enables
		hardware-acceleration for SHA1/SHA256 progressive hashing.
		Data can be streamed in a block at a time and the hashing
		is performed in hardware.
3069 3070 3071 3072

		Note: There is also a sha1sum command, which should perhaps
		be deprecated in favour of 'hash sha1'.

3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087
- Freescale i.MX specific commands:
		CONFIG_CMD_HDMIDETECT
		This enables 'hdmidet' command which returns true if an
		HDMI monitor is detected.  This command is i.MX 6 specific.

		CONFIG_CMD_BMODE
		This enables the 'bmode' (bootmode) command for forcing
		a boot from specific media.

		This is useful for forcing the ROM's usb downloader to
		activate upon a watchdog reset which is nice when iterating
		on U-Boot.  Using the reset button or running bmode normal
		will set it back to normal.  This command currently
		supports i.MX53 and i.MX6.

3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107
- bootcount support:
		CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT

		This enables the bootcounter support, see:
		http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit

		CONFIG_AT91SAM9XE
		enable special bootcounter support on at91sam9xe based boards.
		CONFIG_BLACKFIN
		enable special bootcounter support on blackfin based boards.
		CONFIG_SOC_DA8XX
		enable special bootcounter support on da850 based boards.
		CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_RAM
		enable support for the bootcounter in RAM
		CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_I2C
		enable support for the bootcounter on an i2c (like RTC) device.
			CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RTC_ADDR = i2c chip address
			CONFIG_SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR = i2c addr which is used for
						    the bootcounter.
			CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ALEN = address len
3108

W
wdenk 已提交
3109
- Show boot progress:
W
wdenk 已提交
3110 3111
		CONFIG_SHOW_BOOT_PROGRESS

W
wdenk 已提交
3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117
		Defining this option allows to add some board-
		specific code (calling a user-provided function
		"show_boot_progress(int)") that enables you to show
		the system's boot progress on some display (for
		example, some LED's) on your board. At the moment,
		the following checkpoints are implemented:
W
wdenk 已提交
3118

3119

3120 3121
Legacy uImage format:

W
wdenk 已提交
3122 3123
  Arg	Where			When
    1	common/cmd_bootm.c	before attempting to boot an image
W
wdenk 已提交
3124
   -1	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image header has bad	 magic number
W
wdenk 已提交
3125
    2	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image header has correct magic number
W
wdenk 已提交
3126
   -2	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image header has bad	 checksum
W
wdenk 已提交
3127
    3	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image header has correct checksum
W
wdenk 已提交
3128
   -3	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image data   has bad	 checksum
W
wdenk 已提交
3129 3130 3131
    4	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image data   has correct checksum
   -4	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image is for unsupported architecture
    5	common/cmd_bootm.c	Architecture check OK
3132
   -5	common/cmd_bootm.c	Wrong Image Type (not kernel, multi)
W
wdenk 已提交
3133 3134 3135 3136
    6	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image Type check OK
   -6	common/cmd_bootm.c	gunzip uncompression error
   -7	common/cmd_bootm.c	Unimplemented compression type
    7	common/cmd_bootm.c	Uncompression OK
3137
    8	common/cmd_bootm.c	No uncompress/copy overwrite error
W
wdenk 已提交
3138
   -9	common/cmd_bootm.c	Unsupported OS (not Linux, BSD, VxWorks, QNX)
3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146

    9	common/image.c		Start initial ramdisk verification
  -10	common/image.c		Ramdisk header has bad	   magic number
  -11	common/image.c		Ramdisk header has bad	   checksum
   10	common/image.c		Ramdisk header is OK
  -12	common/image.c		Ramdisk data   has bad	   checksum
   11	common/image.c		Ramdisk data   has correct checksum
   12	common/image.c		Ramdisk verification complete, start loading
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3147
  -13	common/image.c		Wrong Image Type (not PPC Linux ramdisk)
3148 3149 3150
   13	common/image.c		Start multifile image verification
   14	common/image.c		No initial ramdisk, no multifile, continue.

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3151
   15	arch/<arch>/lib/bootm.c All preparation done, transferring control to OS
W
wdenk 已提交
3152

S
Stefan Roese 已提交
3153
  -30	arch/powerpc/lib/board.c	Fatal error, hang the system
W
wdenk 已提交
3154 3155
  -31	post/post.c		POST test failed, detected by post_output_backlog()
  -32	post/post.c		POST test failed, detected by post_run_single()
3156

3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206
   34	common/cmd_doc.c	before loading a Image from a DOC device
  -35	common/cmd_doc.c	Bad usage of "doc" command
   35	common/cmd_doc.c	correct usage of "doc" command
  -36	common/cmd_doc.c	No boot device
   36	common/cmd_doc.c	correct boot device
  -37	common/cmd_doc.c	Unknown Chip ID on boot device
   37	common/cmd_doc.c	correct chip ID found, device available
  -38	common/cmd_doc.c	Read Error on boot device
   38	common/cmd_doc.c	reading Image header from DOC device OK
  -39	common/cmd_doc.c	Image header has bad magic number
   39	common/cmd_doc.c	Image header has correct magic number
  -40	common/cmd_doc.c	Error reading Image from DOC device
   40	common/cmd_doc.c	Image header has correct magic number
   41	common/cmd_ide.c	before loading a Image from a IDE device
  -42	common/cmd_ide.c	Bad usage of "ide" command
   42	common/cmd_ide.c	correct usage of "ide" command
  -43	common/cmd_ide.c	No boot device
   43	common/cmd_ide.c	boot device found
  -44	common/cmd_ide.c	Device not available
   44	common/cmd_ide.c	Device available
  -45	common/cmd_ide.c	wrong partition selected
   45	common/cmd_ide.c	partition selected
  -46	common/cmd_ide.c	Unknown partition table
   46	common/cmd_ide.c	valid partition table found
  -47	common/cmd_ide.c	Invalid partition type
   47	common/cmd_ide.c	correct partition type
  -48	common/cmd_ide.c	Error reading Image Header on boot device
   48	common/cmd_ide.c	reading Image Header from IDE device OK
  -49	common/cmd_ide.c	Image header has bad magic number
   49	common/cmd_ide.c	Image header has correct magic number
  -50	common/cmd_ide.c	Image header has bad	 checksum
   50	common/cmd_ide.c	Image header has correct checksum
  -51	common/cmd_ide.c	Error reading Image from IDE device
   51	common/cmd_ide.c	reading Image from IDE device OK
   52	common/cmd_nand.c	before loading a Image from a NAND device
  -53	common/cmd_nand.c	Bad usage of "nand" command
   53	common/cmd_nand.c	correct usage of "nand" command
  -54	common/cmd_nand.c	No boot device
   54	common/cmd_nand.c	boot device found
  -55	common/cmd_nand.c	Unknown Chip ID on boot device
   55	common/cmd_nand.c	correct chip ID found, device available
  -56	common/cmd_nand.c	Error reading Image Header on boot device
   56	common/cmd_nand.c	reading Image Header from NAND device OK
  -57	common/cmd_nand.c	Image header has bad magic number
   57	common/cmd_nand.c	Image header has correct magic number
  -58	common/cmd_nand.c	Error reading Image from NAND device
   58	common/cmd_nand.c	reading Image from NAND device OK

  -60	common/env_common.c	Environment has a bad CRC, using default

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3207
   64	net/eth.c		starting with Ethernet configuration.
3208 3209 3210 3211
  -64	net/eth.c		no Ethernet found.
   65	net/eth.c		Ethernet found.

  -80	common/cmd_net.c	usage wrong
3212 3213 3214
   80	common/cmd_net.c	before calling net_loop()
  -81	common/cmd_net.c	some error in net_loop() occurred
   81	common/cmd_net.c	net_loop() back without error
3215 3216
  -82	common/cmd_net.c	size == 0 (File with size 0 loaded)
   82	common/cmd_net.c	trying automatic boot
3217 3218
   83	common/cmd_net.c	running "source" command
  -83	common/cmd_net.c	some error in automatic boot or "source" command
3219
   84	common/cmd_net.c	end without errors
W
wdenk 已提交
3220

3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229
FIT uImage format:

  Arg	Where			When
  100	common/cmd_bootm.c	Kernel FIT Image has correct format
 -100	common/cmd_bootm.c	Kernel FIT Image has incorrect format
  101	common/cmd_bootm.c	No Kernel subimage unit name, using configuration
 -101	common/cmd_bootm.c	Can't get configuration for kernel subimage
  102	common/cmd_bootm.c	Kernel unit name specified
 -103	common/cmd_bootm.c	Can't get kernel subimage node offset
3230
  103	common/cmd_bootm.c	Found configuration node
3231 3232 3233 3234 3235
  104	common/cmd_bootm.c	Got kernel subimage node offset
 -104	common/cmd_bootm.c	Kernel subimage hash verification failed
  105	common/cmd_bootm.c	Kernel subimage hash verification OK
 -105	common/cmd_bootm.c	Kernel subimage is for unsupported architecture
  106	common/cmd_bootm.c	Architecture check OK
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3236 3237
 -106	common/cmd_bootm.c	Kernel subimage has wrong type
  107	common/cmd_bootm.c	Kernel subimage type OK
3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249
 -107	common/cmd_bootm.c	Can't get kernel subimage data/size
  108	common/cmd_bootm.c	Got kernel subimage data/size
 -108	common/cmd_bootm.c	Wrong image type (not legacy, FIT)
 -109	common/cmd_bootm.c	Can't get kernel subimage type
 -110	common/cmd_bootm.c	Can't get kernel subimage comp
 -111	common/cmd_bootm.c	Can't get kernel subimage os
 -112	common/cmd_bootm.c	Can't get kernel subimage load address
 -113	common/cmd_bootm.c	Image uncompress/copy overwrite error

  120	common/image.c		Start initial ramdisk verification
 -120	common/image.c		Ramdisk FIT image has incorrect format
  121	common/image.c		Ramdisk FIT image has correct format
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3250
  122	common/image.c		No ramdisk subimage unit name, using configuration
3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263
 -122	common/image.c		Can't get configuration for ramdisk subimage
  123	common/image.c		Ramdisk unit name specified
 -124	common/image.c		Can't get ramdisk subimage node offset
  125	common/image.c		Got ramdisk subimage node offset
 -125	common/image.c		Ramdisk subimage hash verification failed
  126	common/image.c		Ramdisk subimage hash verification OK
 -126	common/image.c		Ramdisk subimage for unsupported architecture
  127	common/image.c		Architecture check OK
 -127	common/image.c		Can't get ramdisk subimage data/size
  128	common/image.c		Got ramdisk subimage data/size
  129	common/image.c		Can't get ramdisk load address
 -129	common/image.c		Got ramdisk load address

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3264
 -130	common/cmd_doc.c	Incorrect FIT image format
3265 3266
  131	common/cmd_doc.c	FIT image format OK

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3267
 -140	common/cmd_ide.c	Incorrect FIT image format
3268 3269
  141	common/cmd_ide.c	FIT image format OK

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3270
 -150	common/cmd_nand.c	Incorrect FIT image format
3271 3272
  151	common/cmd_nand.c	FIT image format OK

3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285
- legacy image format:
		CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY
		enables the legacy image format support in U-Boot.

		Default:
		enabled if CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE is not defined.

		CONFIG_DISABLE_IMAGE_LEGACY
		disable the legacy image format

		This define is introduced, as the legacy image format is
		enabled per default for backward compatibility.

3286
- FIT image support:
D
Dirk Eibach 已提交
3287 3288 3289 3290 3291
		CONFIG_FIT_DISABLE_SHA256
		Supporting SHA256 hashes has quite an impact on binary size.
		For constrained systems sha256 hash support can be disabled
		with this option.

3292 3293 3294
		TODO(sjg@chromium.org): Adjust this option to be positive,
		and move it to Kconfig

3295 3296 3297
- Standalone program support:
		CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3298 3299 3300
		This option defines a board specific value for the
		address where standalone program gets loaded, thus
		overwriting the architecture dependent default
3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306
		settings.

- Frame Buffer Address:
		CONFIG_FB_ADDR

		Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific
3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313
		address for frame buffer.  This is typically the case
		when using a graphics controller has separate video
		memory.  U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at
		the given address instead of dynamically reserving it
		in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs
		the memory for the frame buffer depending on the
		configured panel size.
3314 3315 3316

		Please see board_init_f function.

3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335
- Automatic software updates via TFTP server
		CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP
		CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX
		CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX

		These options enable and control the auto-update feature;
		for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update.

- MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support)
		CONFIG_MTD_DEVICE

		Adds the MTD device infrastructure from the Linux kernel.
		Needed for mtdparts command support.

		CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS

		Adds the MTD partitioning infrastructure from the Linux
		kernel. Needed for UBI support.

3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343
- UBI support
		CONFIG_CMD_UBI

		Adds commands for interacting with MTD partitions formatted
		with the UBI flash translation layer

		Requires also defining CONFIG_RBTREE

3344 3345 3346 3347 3348
		CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG

		Make the verbose messages from UBI stop printing.  This leaves
		warnings and errors enabled.

3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363

		CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD
		This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest
		erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks
		of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing
		wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase
		counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter.

		The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and
		other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more.
		However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock
		life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g.,
		to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2).

		default: 4096
3364

3365 3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406
		CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT
		This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI
		expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the
		underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR
		flash), this value is ignored.

		NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM
		(Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime.
		The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks
		then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)",
		which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total
		count of eraseblocks on the chip).

		To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to
		reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks
		handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire
		NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means
		that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad
		eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same
		size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a
		partition.

		default: 20

		CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP
		Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device
		in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it
		only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device.
		The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach
		the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where
		attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install
		a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter
		CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note
		that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations
		without	fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap
		fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps.

		CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT
		Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images
		without a fastmap.
		default: 0

H
Heiko Schocher 已提交
3407 3408 3409 3410
		CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG
		Enable UBI fastmap debug
		default: 0

3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 3416 3417 3418
- UBIFS support
		CONFIG_CMD_UBIFS

		Adds commands for interacting with UBI volumes formatted as
		UBIFS.  UBIFS is read-only in u-boot.

		Requires UBI support as well as CONFIG_LZO

3419 3420 3421 3422 3423
		CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG

		Make the verbose messages from UBIFS stop printing.  This leaves
		warnings and errors enabled.

3424
- SPL framework
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3425 3426
		CONFIG_SPL
		Enable building of SPL globally.
3427

3428 3429 3430
		CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT
		LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary.

3431 3432 3433 3434
		CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT
		Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included.
		When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory
		used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
3435
		CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
3436 3437
		must not be both defined at the same time.

3438
		CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE
3439 3440 3441 3442
		Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and
		linker lists sections), BSS excluded.
		When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does
		not exceed it.
3443

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3444 3445
		CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE
		TEXT_BASE for linking the SPL binary.
3446

3447 3448 3449 3450
		CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE
		Address to relocate to.  If unspecified, this is equal to
		CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done).

3451 3452 3453 3454
		CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR
		Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary.

		CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
3455 3456 3457
		Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS.
		When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used
		by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
3458
		CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
3459
		must not be both defined at the same time.
3460 3461 3462 3463

		CONFIG_SPL_STACK
		Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use

3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473
		CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE
		When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has
		loaded does not have a signature.
		Defining this is useful when code which loads images
		in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors
		will be caught.
		An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will
		consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad,
		and thus should be skipped silently.

3474 3475 3476 3477
		CONFIG_SPL_ABORT_ON_RAW_IMAGE
		When defined, SPL will proceed to another boot method
		if the image it has loaded does not have a signature.

3478 3479 3480 3481 3482
		CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK
		Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after
		relocation.  If unspecified, this is equal to
		CONFIG_SPL_STACK.

3483 3484
		CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START
		Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL.
3485 3486 3487
		When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and
		it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc()
		can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined.
3488 3489 3490

		CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE
		The size of the malloc pool used in SPL.
3491

3492 3493 3494 3495 3496
		CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK
		Enable the SPL framework under common/.  This framework
		supports MMC, NAND and YMODEM loading of U-Boot and NAND
		NAND loading of the Linux Kernel.

3497 3498 3499 3500
		CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT
		Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL.
		See also: doc/README.falcon

3501 3502 3503 3504
		CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT
		For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information
		about the running system.

3505 3506 3507
		CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL
		Arch init code should be built for a very small image

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3508 3509
		CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT
		Support for common/libcommon.o in SPL binary
3510

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3511 3512
		CONFIG_SPL_LIBDISK_SUPPORT
		Support for disk/libdisk.o in SPL binary
3513

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3514 3515
		CONFIG_SPL_I2C_SUPPORT
		Support for drivers/i2c/libi2c.o in SPL binary
3516

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3517 3518
		CONFIG_SPL_GPIO_SUPPORT
		Support for drivers/gpio/libgpio.o in SPL binary
3519

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3520 3521
		CONFIG_SPL_MMC_SUPPORT
		Support for drivers/mmc/libmmc.o in SPL binary
3522

3523 3524
		CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_SECTOR,
		CONFIG_SYS_U_BOOT_MAX_SIZE_SECTORS,
3525
		Address and partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from
3526 3527
		when the MMC is being used in raw mode.

3528 3529 3530 3531
		CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_PARTITION
		Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being
		used in raw mode

3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541
		CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR
		Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being
		used in raw mode (for Falcon mode)

		CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR,
		CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS
		Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument
		parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode
		(for falcon mode)

3542 3543 3544 3545
		CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_FS_BOOT_PARTITION
		Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being
		used in fs mode

3546 3547 3548
		CONFIG_SPL_FAT_SUPPORT
		Support for fs/fat/libfat.o in SPL binary

3549 3550
		CONFIG_SPL_EXT_SUPPORT
		Support for EXT filesystem in SPL binary
3551

3552 3553 3554 3555
		CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME
		Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem

		CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME
3556
		Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading
3557
		from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
3558

3559
		CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME
3560
		Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters
3561
		when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
3562

3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568
		CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND
		Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that
		start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before
		continuing (the hardware starts execution after just
		loading the first page rather than the full 4K).

3569 3570 3571
		CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE
		Avoid SPL relocation

3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581
		CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE
		Include nand_base.c in the SPL.  Requires
		CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS.

		CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS
		SPL uses normal NAND drivers, not minimal drivers.

		CONFIG_SPL_NAND_ECC
		Include standard software ECC in the SPL

3582
		CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE
S
Scott Wood 已提交
3583 3584
		Support for NAND boot using simple NAND drivers that
		expose the cmd_ctrl() interface.
3585

3586 3587 3588 3589
		CONFIG_SPL_MTD_SUPPORT
		Support for the MTD subsystem within SPL.  Useful for
		environment on NAND support within SPL.

3590 3591 3592 3593
		CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY
		Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only
		if you need to save space.

3594 3595
		CONFIG_SPL_MPC8XXX_INIT_DDR_SUPPORT
		Set for the SPL on PPC mpc8xxx targets, support for
3596
		drivers/ddr/fsl/libddr.o in SPL binary.
3597

3598 3599 3600 3601
		CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR
		Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in
		SPL binary.

3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607
		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT,
		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE,
		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS,
		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE,
		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES
		Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses
S
Scott Wood 已提交
3608
		to read U-Boot
3609

3610 3611 3612
		CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BOOT
		Add support NAND boot

3613
		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS
S
Scott Wood 已提交
3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620
		Location in NAND to read U-Boot from

		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST
		Location in memory to load U-Boot to

		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE
		Size of image to load
3621 3622

		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START
S
Scott Wood 已提交
3623
		Entry point in loaded image to jump to
3624 3625 3626

		CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST
		Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the
3627
		data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms.
3628 3629 3630 3631 3632

		CONFIG_SPL_OMAP3_ID_NAND
		Support for an OMAP3-specific set of functions to return the
		ID and MFR of the first attached NAND chip, if present.

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3633 3634
		CONFIG_SPL_SERIAL_SUPPORT
		Support for drivers/serial/libserial.o in SPL binary
3635

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3636 3637
		CONFIG_SPL_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT
		Support for drivers/mtd/spi/libspi_flash.o in SPL binary
3638

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3639 3640
		CONFIG_SPL_SPI_SUPPORT
		Support for drivers/spi/libspi.o in SPL binary
3641 3642 3643

		CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE
		Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary
3644

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3645 3646
		CONFIG_SPL_LIBGENERIC_SUPPORT
		Support for lib/libgeneric.o in SPL binary
3647

3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655
		CONFIG_SPL_ENV_SUPPORT
		Support for the environment operating in SPL binary

		CONFIG_SPL_NET_SUPPORT
		Support for the net/libnet.o in SPL binary.
		It conflicts with SPL env from storage medium specified by
		CONFIG_ENV_IS_xxx but CONFIG_ENV_IS_NOWHERE

3656
		CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO
3657 3658 3659 3660 3661
		Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending
		the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as
		CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
		CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
		payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
3662

S
Scott Wood 已提交
3663 3664 3665 3666 3667
		CONFIG_SPL_TARGET
		Final target image containing SPL and payload.  Some SPLs
		use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for
		example if more than one image needs to be produced.

3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673
		CONFIG_FIT_SPL_PRINT
		Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of
		code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this
		option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the
		bootm command when booting a FIT image.

3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680
- TPL framework
		CONFIG_TPL
		Enable building of TPL globally.

		CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO
		Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending
		the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as
3681 3682 3683
		CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
		CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
		payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
3684

W
wdenk 已提交
3685 3686
- Interrupt support (PPC):

W
wdenk 已提交
3687 3688
		There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt()
		for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu()
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3689
		for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu()
W
wdenk 已提交
3690
		should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3691
		CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt
W
wdenk 已提交
3692
		(ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero.
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3693
		timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU
W
wdenk 已提交
3694 3695 3696
		specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led
		/ other_activity_monitor it works automatically from
		general timer_interrupt().
W
wdenk 已提交
3697

W
wdenk 已提交
3698

3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712
Board initialization settings:
------------------------------

During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions
to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup
before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the
following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is
architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c
typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r().

- CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f()
- CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r()
- CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init()
- CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init()
W
wdenk 已提交
3713 3714 3715 3716

Configuration Settings:
-----------------------

3717 3718 3719
- CONFIG_SYS_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit.
		Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands.

3720
- CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included;
W
wdenk 已提交
3721 3722
		undefine this when you're short of memory.

P
Peter Tyser 已提交
3723 3724 3725
- CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default
		width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output.

3726
- CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT:	This is what U-Boot prints on the console to
W
wdenk 已提交
3727 3728
		prompt for user input.

3729
- CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE:	Buffer size for input from the Console
W
wdenk 已提交
3730

3731
- CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE:	Buffer size for Console output
W
wdenk 已提交
3732

3733
- CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS:	max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands
W
wdenk 已提交
3734

3735
- CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to
W
wdenk 已提交
3736 3737 3738
		the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is
		booted

3739
- CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE:
W
wdenk 已提交
3740 3741
		List of legal baudrate settings for this board.

3742
- CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_INFO_QUIET
W
wdenk 已提交
3743
		Suppress display of console information at boot.
W
wdenk 已提交
3744

3745
- CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV
W
wdenk 已提交
3746 3747 3748
		If the board specific function
			extern int overwrite_console (void);
		returns 1, the stdin, stderr and stdout are switched to the
W
wdenk 已提交
3749 3750
		serial port, else the settings in the environment are used.

3751
- CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_OVERWRITE_ROUTINE
W
wdenk 已提交
3752
		Enable the call to overwrite_console().
W
wdenk 已提交
3753

3754
- CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_ENV_OVERWRITE
W
wdenk 已提交
3755 3756
		Enable overwrite of previous console environment settings.

3757
- CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START, CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END:
W
wdenk 已提交
3758 3759 3760
		Begin and End addresses of the area used by the
		simple memory test.

3761
- CONFIG_SYS_ALT_MEMTEST:
W
wdenk 已提交
3762
		Enable an alternate, more extensive memory test.
W
wdenk 已提交
3763

3764
- CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_SCRATCH:
W
wdenk 已提交
3765 3766 3767
		Scratch address used by the alternate memory test
		You only need to set this if address zero isn't writeable

Y
York Sun 已提交
3768 3769 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775
- CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE
		If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory
		is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS.
		This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable
		gd->secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems
		the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks,
		this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address.

3776
- CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE:
3777
		If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header,
3778
		this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3779
		(end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By
3780 3781 3782
		fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed
		the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either.
		This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux
3783
		board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that
3784
		recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup
3785
		will have to get fixed in Linux additionally.
3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796

		This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx
		CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't
		be touched.

		WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of
		the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case,
		then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a
		non page size aligned address and this could cause major
		problems.

3797
- CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE:
W
wdenk 已提交
3798 3799
		Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download

3800
- CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE:
W
wdenk 已提交
3801 3802
		Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here.

3803
- CONFIG_SYS_MBIO_BASE:
W
wdenk 已提交
3804 3805 3806
		Physical start address of Motherboard I/O (if using a
		Cogent motherboard)

3807
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE:
W
wdenk 已提交
3808 3809
		Physical start address of Flash memory.

3810
- CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE:
W
wdenk 已提交
3811 3812
		Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by
		make config files to be same as the text base address
3813
		(CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as
3814
		CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash.
W
wdenk 已提交
3815

3816
- CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN:
W
wdenk 已提交
3817 3818 3819 3820
		Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to
		determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is
		embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate
		flash sector.
W
wdenk 已提交
3821

3822
- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN:
W
wdenk 已提交
3823 3824
		Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use.

3825 3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834
- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN
		Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If
		this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation
		will become available before relocation. The address is just
		below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make
		space.

		This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses
		within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc()
		is not available. free() is supported but does nothing.
3835
		The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when
3836 3837
		U-Boot relocates itself.

3838 3839 3840 3841 3842
- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE
		Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those
		boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is
		enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START).

3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861
- CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY:
		Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be
		typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped
		uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would
		otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For
		some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the
		cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed
		are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding
		cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e.
		if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the
		size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of
		one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has
		written to another region in the same cache-line. This can
		happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for
		buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g.
		16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes).

		Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present.

3862
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN:
3863 3864
		Normally compressed uImages are limited to an
		uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough,
3865
		you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file
3866 3867
		to adjust this setting to your needs.

3868
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ:
W
wdenk 已提交
3869 3870
		Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of
		the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by
3871 3872
		the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if
		used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low"
3873
		environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case
3874
		all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low"
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3875
		and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ.	 The environment
3876 3877 3878
		variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of
		CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ.  If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined,
		then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead.
W
wdenk 已提交
3879

3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH:
		Enable initrd_high functionality.  If defined then the
		initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand
		is enabled.

- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE:
		Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between
		"bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.

- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD:
		Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in
		space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.

3893
- CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS:
W
wdenk 已提交
3894 3895
		Max number of Flash memory banks

3896
- CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT:
W
wdenk 已提交
3897 3898
		Max number of sectors on a Flash chip

3899
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT:
W
wdenk 已提交
3900 3901
		Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms)

3902
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT:
W
wdenk 已提交
3903 3904
		Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms)

3905
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT
W
wdenk 已提交
3906 3907
		Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms)

3908
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT
W
wdenk 已提交
3909 3910
		Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms)

3911
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION
W
wdenk 已提交
3912 3913 3914
		If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used
		instead of U-Boot software protection.

3915
- CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP:
W
wdenk 已提交
3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923

		Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory;
		without this option such a download has to be
		performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2)
		copy from RAM to flash.

		The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since
		you can check if the download worked before you erase
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3924 3925
		the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is
		too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the
W
wdenk 已提交
3926 3927
		downloaded image) this option may be very useful.

3928
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI:
W
wdenk 已提交
3929
		Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the
W
wdenk 已提交
3930 3931
		common flash structure for storing flash geometry.

3932
- CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER
W
wdenk 已提交
3933 3934
		This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver
		in the drivers directory
W
wdenk 已提交
3935

P
Piotr Ziecik 已提交
3936 3937 3938 3939 3940
- CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD
		This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver
		in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash
		to the MTD layer.

3941
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE
3942 3943 3944 3945 3946 3947
		Use buffered writes to flash.

- CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N
		s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered
		write commands.

3948
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST
3949 3950 3951 3952 3953
		If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't
		print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This
		is useful, if some of the configured banks are only
		optionally available.

3954 3955 3956 3957 3958
- CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS
		If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown
		digits and dots.  Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80
		column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays.

3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967
- CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY
		If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared
		against the source after the write operation. An error message
		will be printed when the contents are not identical.
		Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases,
		since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier
		while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable
		this option if you really know what you are doing.

3968
- CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER:
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3969 3970
		Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some
		Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value
S
stroese 已提交
3971 3972
		to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all
		buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
3973
		on high Ethernet traffic.
S
stroese 已提交
3974 3975
		Defaults to 4 if not defined.

3976 3977
- CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
3978 3979 3980 3981 3982
	Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used
	internally to store the environment settings. The default
	setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most
	cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see
	lib/hashtable.c for details.
3983

3984 3985
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
3986
	Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when
3987 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992
	calling env set.  Variables can be restricted to only decimal,
	hexadecimal, or boolean.  If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined,
	the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address.

	The format of the list is:
		type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m]
3993 3994
		access_attribute = [a|r|o|c]
		attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute]
3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005
		entry = variable_name[:attributes]
		list = entry[,list]

	The type attributes are:
		s - String (default)
		d - Decimal
		x - Hexadecimal
		b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF])
		i - IP address
		m - MAC address

4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011
	The access attributes are:
		a - Any (default)
		r - Read-only
		o - Write-once
		c - Change-default

4012 4013
	- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
		Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags"
4014
		environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022

	- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
		Define this to a list (string) to define validation that
		should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags"
		environment variable.  To override a setting in the static
		list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the
		".flags" variable.

4023 4024 4025 4026
	If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
	regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same
	flags without explicitly listing them for each variable.

4027 4028 4029 4030
- CONFIG_ENV_ACCESS_IGNORE_FORCE
	If defined, don't allow the -f switch to env set override variable
	access flags.

4031 4032 4033
- CONFIG_OMAP_PLATFORM_RESET_TIME_MAX_USEC (OMAP only)
	This is set by OMAP boards for the max time that reset should
	be asserted. See doc/README.omap-reset-time for details on how
4034
	the value can be calculated on a given board.
4035

4036 4037 4038 4039 4040
- CONFIG_USE_STDINT
	If stdint.h is available with your toolchain you can define this
	option to enable it. You can provide option 'USE_STDINT=1' when
	building U-Boot to enable this.

W
wdenk 已提交
4041 4042 4043 4044
The following definitions that deal with the placement and management
of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the
following configurations:

4045 4046 4047 4048 4049
- CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC:

	Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils
	may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images.

4050
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_FLASH:
W
wdenk 已提交
4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065

	Define this if the environment is in flash memory.

	a) The environment occupies one whole flash sector, which is
	   "embedded" in the text segment with the U-Boot code. This
	   happens usually with "bottom boot sector" or "top boot
	   sector" type flash chips, which have several smaller
	   sectors at the start or the end. For instance, such a
	   layout can have sector sizes of 8, 2x4, 16, Nx32 kB. In
	   such a case you would place the environment in one of the
	   4 kB sectors - with U-Boot code before and after it. With
	   "top boot sector" type flash chips, you would put the
	   environment in one of the last sectors, leaving a gap
	   between U-Boot and the environment.

4066
	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
W
wdenk 已提交
4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072

	   Offset of environment data (variable area) to the
	   beginning of flash memory; for instance, with bottom boot
	   type flash chips the second sector can be used: the offset
	   for this sector is given here.

4073
	   CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET is used relative to CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE.
W
wdenk 已提交
4074

4075
	- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR:
W
wdenk 已提交
4076 4077 4078

	   This is just another way to specify the start address of
	   the flash sector containing the environment (instead of
4079
	   CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET).
W
wdenk 已提交
4080

4081
	- CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE:
W
wdenk 已提交
4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089

	   Size of the sector containing the environment.


	b) Sometimes flash chips have few, equal sized, BIG sectors.
	   In such a case you don't want to spend a whole sector for
	   the environment.

4090
	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
W
wdenk 已提交
4091

4092
	   If you use this in combination with CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_FLASH
4093
	   and CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE, you can specify to use only a part
W
wdenk 已提交
4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106
	   of this flash sector for the environment. This saves
	   memory for the RAM copy of the environment.

	   It may also save flash memory if you decide to use this
	   when your environment is "embedded" within U-Boot code,
	   since then the remainder of the flash sector could be used
	   for U-Boot code. It should be pointed out that this is
	   STRONGLY DISCOURAGED from a robustness point of view:
	   updating the environment in flash makes it always
	   necessary to erase the WHOLE sector. If something goes
	   wrong before the contents has been restored from a copy in
	   RAM, your target system will be dead.

4107 4108
	- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR_REDUND
	  CONFIG_ENV_SIZE_REDUND
W
wdenk 已提交
4109

W
wdenk 已提交
4110
	   These settings describe a second storage area used to hold
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
4111
	   a redundant copy of the environment data, so that there is
W
wdenk 已提交
4112
	   a valid backup copy in case there is a power failure during
W
wdenk 已提交
4113
	   a "saveenv" operation.
W
wdenk 已提交
4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119

BE CAREFUL! Any changes to the flash layout, and some changes to the
source code will make it necessary to adapt <board>/u-boot.lds*
accordingly!


4120
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_NVRAM:
W
wdenk 已提交
4121 4122 4123 4124 4125

	Define this if you have some non-volatile memory device
	(NVRAM, battery buffered SRAM) which you want to use for the
	environment.

4126 4127
	- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR:
	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
W
wdenk 已提交
4128

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
4129
	  These two #defines are used to determine the memory area you
W
wdenk 已提交
4130 4131 4132 4133 4134
	  want to use for environment. It is assumed that this memory
	  can just be read and written to, without any special
	  provision.

BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early
4135
in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
4136
console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or
W
wdenk 已提交
4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144
U-Boot will hang.

Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the
environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to
keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv"
to save the current settings.


4145
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_EEPROM:
W
wdenk 已提交
4146 4147 4148 4149

	Use this if you have an EEPROM or similar serial access
	device and a driver for it.

4150 4151
	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
W
wdenk 已提交
4152 4153 4154 4155

	  These two #defines specify the offset and size of the
	  environment area within the total memory of your EEPROM.

4156
	- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_EEPROM_ADDR:
W
wdenk 已提交
4157 4158 4159
	  If defined, specified the chip address of the EEPROM device.
	  The default address is zero.

4160 4161 4162
	- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_EEPROM_BUS:
	  If defined, specified the i2c bus of the EEPROM device.

4163
	- CONFIG_SYS_EEPROM_PAGE_WRITE_BITS:
W
wdenk 已提交
4164 4165 4166 4167
	  If defined, the number of bits used to address bytes in a
	  single page in the EEPROM device.  A 64 byte page, for example
	  would require six bits.

4168
	- CONFIG_SYS_EEPROM_PAGE_WRITE_DELAY_MS:
W
wdenk 已提交
4169
	  If defined, the number of milliseconds to delay between
W
wdenk 已提交
4170
	  page writes.	The default is zero milliseconds.
W
wdenk 已提交
4171

4172
	- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_EEPROM_ADDR_LEN:
W
wdenk 已提交
4173 4174 4175
	  The length in bytes of the EEPROM memory array address.  Note
	  that this is NOT the chip address length!

4176
	- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_EEPROM_ADDR_OVERFLOW:
4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186
	  EEPROM chips that implement "address overflow" are ones
	  like Catalyst 24WC04/08/16 which has 9/10/11 bits of
	  address and the extra bits end up in the "chip address" bit
	  slots. This makes a 24WC08 (1Kbyte) chip look like four 256
	  byte chips.

	  Note that we consider the length of the address field to
	  still be one byte because the extra address bits are hidden
	  in the chip address.

4187
	- CONFIG_SYS_EEPROM_SIZE:
W
wdenk 已提交
4188 4189
	  The size in bytes of the EEPROM device.

H
Heiko Schocher 已提交
4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198
	- CONFIG_ENV_EEPROM_IS_ON_I2C
	  define this, if you have I2C and SPI activated, and your
	  EEPROM, which holds the environment, is on the I2C bus.

	- CONFIG_I2C_ENV_EEPROM_BUS
	  if you have an Environment on an EEPROM reached over
	  I2C muxes, you can define here, how to reach this
	  EEPROM. For example:

4199
	  #define CONFIG_I2C_ENV_EEPROM_BUS	  1
H
Heiko Schocher 已提交
4200 4201 4202

	  EEPROM which holds the environment, is reached over
	  a pca9547 i2c mux with address 0x70, channel 3.
W
wdenk 已提交
4203

4204
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_DATAFLASH:
4205

W
wdenk 已提交
4206
	Define this if you have a DataFlash memory device which you
4207 4208
	want to use for the environment.

4209 4210 4211
	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
	- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR:
	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
4212 4213 4214 4215 4216

	  These three #defines specify the offset and size of the
	  environment area within the total memory of your DataFlash placed
	  at the specified address.

4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_SPI_FLASH:

	Define this if you have a SPI Flash memory device which you
	want to use for the environment.

	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:

	  These two #defines specify the offset and size of the
	  environment area within the SPI Flash. CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET must be
	  aligned to an erase sector boundary.

	- CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE:

	  Define the SPI flash's sector size.

	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND (optional):

	  This setting describes a second storage area of CONFIG_ENV_SIZE
	  size used to hold a redundant copy of the environment data, so
	  that there is a valid backup copy in case there is a power failure
	  during a "saveenv" operation. CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_RENDUND must be
	  aligned to an erase sector boundary.

	- CONFIG_ENV_SPI_BUS (optional):
	- CONFIG_ENV_SPI_CS (optional):

	  Define the SPI bus and chip select. If not defined they will be 0.

	- CONFIG_ENV_SPI_MAX_HZ (optional):

	  Define the SPI max work clock. If not defined then use 1MHz.

	- CONFIG_ENV_SPI_MODE (optional):

	  Define the SPI work mode. If not defined then use SPI_MODE_3.

4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_REMOTE:

	Define this if you have a remote memory space which you
	want to use for the local device's environment.

	- CONFIG_ENV_ADDR:
	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:

	  These two #defines specify the address and size of the
	  environment area within the remote memory space. The
	  local device can get the environment from remote memory
4265
	  space by SRIO or PCIE links.
4266 4267 4268

BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use
"saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the
4269 4270
environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link,
but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface.
4271

4272
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_NAND:
W
wdenk 已提交
4273 4274 4275 4276

	Define this if you have a NAND device which you want to use
	for the environment.

4277 4278
	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:
W
wdenk 已提交
4279 4280

	  These two #defines specify the offset and size of the environment
S
Scott Wood 已提交
4281 4282
	  area within the first NAND device.  CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET must be
	  aligned to an erase block boundary.
4283

S
Scott Wood 已提交
4284
	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND (optional):
4285

4286
	  This setting describes a second storage area of CONFIG_ENV_SIZE
S
Scott Wood 已提交
4287 4288
	  size used to hold a redundant copy of the environment data, so
	  that there is a valid backup copy in case there is a power failure
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
4289
	  during a "saveenv" operation.	 CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_RENDUND must be
S
Scott Wood 已提交
4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306
	  aligned to an erase block boundary.

	- CONFIG_ENV_RANGE (optional):

	  Specifies the length of the region in which the environment
	  can be written.  This should be a multiple of the NAND device's
	  block size.  Specifying a range with more erase blocks than
	  are needed to hold CONFIG_ENV_SIZE allows bad blocks within
	  the range to be avoided.

	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_OOB (optional):

	  Enables support for dynamically retrieving the offset of the
	  environment from block zero's out-of-band data.  The
	  "nand env.oob" command can be used to record this offset.
	  Currently, CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND is not supported when
	  using CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_OOB.
4307

4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313
- CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST

	Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the
	environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to
	CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE.

4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_UBI:

	Define this if you have an UBI volume that you want to use for the
	environment.  This has the benefit of wear-leveling the environment
	accesses, which is important on NAND.

	- CONFIG_ENV_UBI_PART:

	  Define this to a string that is the mtd partition containing the UBI.

	- CONFIG_ENV_UBI_VOLUME:

	  Define this to the name of the volume that you want to store the
	  environment in.

4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334
	- CONFIG_ENV_UBI_VOLUME_REDUND:

	  Define this to the name of another volume to store a second copy of
	  the environment in.  This will enable redundant environments in UBI.
	  It is assumed that both volumes are in the same MTD partition.

4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340
	- CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG
	- CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG

	  You will probably want to define these to avoid a really noisy system
	  when storing the env in UBI.

4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_FAT:
       Define this if you want to use the FAT file system for the environment.

       - FAT_ENV_INTERFACE:

         Define this to a string that is the name of the block device.

       - FAT_ENV_DEV_AND_PART:

         Define this to a string to specify the partition of the device. It can
         be as following:

           "D:P", "D:0", "D", "D:" or "D:auto" (D, P are integers. And P >= 1)
               - "D:P": device D partition P. Error occurs if device D has no
                        partition table.
               - "D:0": device D.
               - "D" or "D:": device D partition 1 if device D has partition
                              table, or the whole device D if has no partition
                              table.
               - "D:auto": first partition in device D with bootable flag set.
4361
                           If none, first valid partition in device D. If no
4362 4363 4364 4365 4366
                           partition table then means device D.

       - FAT_ENV_FILE:

         It's a string of the FAT file name. This file use to store the
4367
         environment.
4368 4369

       - CONFIG_FAT_WRITE:
4370
         This should be defined. Otherwise it cannot save the environment file.
4371

4372 4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 4392
- CONFIG_ENV_IS_IN_MMC:

	Define this if you have an MMC device which you want to use for the
	environment.

	- CONFIG_SYS_MMC_ENV_DEV:

	  Specifies which MMC device the environment is stored in.

	- CONFIG_SYS_MMC_ENV_PART (optional):

	  Specifies which MMC partition the environment is stored in. If not
	  set, defaults to partition 0, the user area. Common values might be
	  1 (first MMC boot partition), 2 (second MMC boot partition).

	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET:
	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE:

	  These two #defines specify the offset and size of the environment
	  area within the specified MMC device.

4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400
	  If offset is positive (the usual case), it is treated as relative to
	  the start of the MMC partition. If offset is negative, it is treated
	  as relative to the end of the MMC partition. This can be useful if
	  your board may be fitted with different MMC devices, which have
	  different sizes for the MMC partitions, and you always want the
	  environment placed at the very end of the partition, to leave the
	  maximum possible space before it, to store other data.

4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4410
	  These two values are in units of bytes, but must be aligned to an
	  MMC sector boundary.

	- CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND (optional):

	  Specifies a second storage area, of CONFIG_ENV_SIZE size, used to
	  hold a redundant copy of the environment data. This provides a
	  valid backup copy in case the other copy is corrupted, e.g. due
	  to a power failure during a "saveenv" operation.

4411 4412 4413
	  This value may also be positive or negative; this is handled in the
	  same way as CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET.

4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422
	  This value is also in units of bytes, but must also be aligned to
	  an MMC sector boundary.

	- CONFIG_ENV_SIZE_REDUND (optional):

	  This value need not be set, even when CONFIG_ENV_OFFSET_REDUND is
	  set. If this value is set, it must be set to the same value as
	  CONFIG_ENV_SIZE.

4423
- CONFIG_SYS_SPI_INIT_OFFSET
W
wdenk 已提交
4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432

	Defines offset to the initial SPI buffer area in DPRAM. The
	area is used at an early stage (ROM part) if the environment
	is configured to reside in the SPI EEPROM: We need a 520 byte
	scratch DPRAM area. It is used between the two initialization
	calls (spi_init_f() and spi_init_r()). A value of 0xB00 seems
	to be a good choice since it makes it far enough from the
	start of the data area as well as from the stack pointer.

B
Bruce Adler 已提交
4433
Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor
W
wdenk 已提交
4434
has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been
4435
created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use getenv_f()
W
wdenk 已提交
4436 4437
until then to read environment variables.

W
wdenk 已提交
4438 4439 4440 4441 4442 4443
The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor
is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working
with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is
necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the
"baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't
have any device yet where we could complain.]
W
wdenk 已提交
4444 4445 4446

Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if
the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you
W
wdenk 已提交
4447
use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment.
W
wdenk 已提交
4448

4449
- CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN:
W
wdenk 已提交
4450
		Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED.
W
wdenk 已提交
4451

4452
		Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR
W
wdenk 已提交
4453 4454
		      also needs to be defined.

4455
- CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR:
W
wdenk 已提交
4456
		MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state.
W
wdenk 已提交
4457

4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 4463 4464
- CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS:
		Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init
		and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at
		drivers/serial/ns16550.c.  This option is useful for saving
		space for already greatly restricted images, including but not
		limited to NAND_SPL configurations.

4465 4466 4467 4468 4469
- CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO
		Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on
		when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called
		to do this.

4470 4471 4472 4473 4474
- CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE
		Similar to the previous option, but display this information
		later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if
		present.

4475 4476 4477 4478 4479
- CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT:
		Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the
		build system checks that the actual size does not
		exceed it.

W
wdenk 已提交
4480
Low Level (hardware related) configuration options:
W
wdenk 已提交
4481
---------------------------------------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
4482

4483
- CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE:
W
wdenk 已提交
4484 4485
		Cache Line Size of the CPU.

4486
- CONFIG_SYS_DEFAULT_IMMR:
W
wdenk 已提交
4487
		Default address of the IMMR after system reset.
W
wdenk 已提交
4488

W
wdenk 已提交
4489 4490 4491
		Needed on some 8260 systems (MPC8260ADS, PQ2FADS-ZU,
		and RPXsuper) to be able to adjust the position of
		the IMMR register after a reset.
W
wdenk 已提交
4492

4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT:
		Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale
		PowerPC SOCs.

- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR:
		Virtual address of CCSR.  On a 32-bit build, this is typically
		the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT.

		CONFIG_SYS_DEFAULT_IMMR must also be set to this value,
		for cross-platform code that uses that macro instead.

- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS:
		Physical address of CCSR.  CCSR can be relocated to a new
		physical address, if desired.  In this case, this macro should
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
4507
		be set to that address.	 Otherwise, it should be set to the
4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515
		same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT.  For example, CCSR
		is typically relocated on 36-bit builds.  It is recommended
		that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros:

		#define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH
			* 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW)

- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH:
4516 4517
		Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS.	This value is typically
		either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build).	This macro is
4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529
		used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
		integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").

- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW:
		Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS.  This macro is
		used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
		integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").

- CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE:
		If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be
		forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated.

W
wdenk 已提交
4530
- Floppy Disk Support:
4531
		CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER
W
wdenk 已提交
4532 4533 4534

		the default drive number (default value 0)

4535
		CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE
W
wdenk 已提交
4536

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
4537
		defines the spacing between FDC chipset registers
W
wdenk 已提交
4538 4539
		(default value 1)

4540
		CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET
W
wdenk 已提交
4541

W
wdenk 已提交
4542 4543
		defines the offset of register from address. It
		depends on which part of the data bus is connected to
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
4544
		the FDC chipset. (default value 0)
W
wdenk 已提交
4545

4546 4547
		If CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET and
		CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER are undefined, they take their
W
wdenk 已提交
4548
		default value.
W
wdenk 已提交
4549

4550
		if CONFIG_SYS_FDC_HW_INIT is defined, then the function
W
wdenk 已提交
4551 4552
		fdc_hw_init() is called at the beginning of the FDC
		setup. fdc_hw_init() must be provided by the board
4553
		source code. It is used to make hardware-dependent
W
wdenk 已提交
4554
		initializations.
W
wdenk 已提交
4555

4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561
- CONFIG_IDE_AHB:
		Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI
		interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface.
		When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to
		IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional
		registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller
4562
		is required.
4563

4564
- CONFIG_SYS_IMMR:	Physical address of the Internal Memory.
W
wdenk 已提交
4565
		DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're
W
wdenk 已提交
4566
		doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx/82xx systems only]
W
wdenk 已提交
4567

4568
- CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR:
W
wdenk 已提交
4569

W
wdenk 已提交
4570
		Start address of memory area that can be used for
W
wdenk 已提交
4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582
		initial data and stack; please note that this must be
		writable memory that is working WITHOUT special
		initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which
		will become available only after programming the
		memory controller and running certain initialization
		sequences.

		U-Boot uses the following memory types:
		- MPC8xx and MPC8260: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU)
		- MPC824X: data cache
		- PPC4xx:  data cache

4583
- CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET:
W
wdenk 已提交
4584 4585

		Offset of the initial data structure in the memory
4586 4587
		area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually
		CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial
W
wdenk 已提交
4588
		data is located at the end of the available space
4589
		(sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE -
4590 4591 4592
		CONFIG_SYS_INIT_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just
		below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR +
		CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward.
W
wdenk 已提交
4593 4594 4595 4596

	Note:
		On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data
		cache for initial memory) the address chosen for
4597
		CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must
W
wdenk 已提交
4598 4599 4600
		point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between
		the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space.

4601
- CONFIG_SYS_SIUMCR:	SIU Module Configuration (11-6)
W
wdenk 已提交
4602

4603
- CONFIG_SYS_SYPCR:	System Protection Control (11-9)
W
wdenk 已提交
4604

4605
- CONFIG_SYS_TBSCR:	Time Base Status and Control (11-26)
W
wdenk 已提交
4606

4607
- CONFIG_SYS_PISCR:	Periodic Interrupt Status and Control (11-31)
W
wdenk 已提交
4608

4609
- CONFIG_SYS_PLPRCR:	PLL, Low-Power, and Reset Control Register (15-30)
W
wdenk 已提交
4610

4611
- CONFIG_SYS_SCCR:	System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27)
W
wdenk 已提交
4612

4613
- CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM:
W
wdenk 已提交
4614 4615
		SDRAM timing

4616
- CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA:
W
wdenk 已提交
4617 4618
		periodic timer for refresh

4619
- CONFIG_SYS_DER:	Debug Event Register (37-47)
W
wdenk 已提交
4620

4621 4622 4623 4624
- FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM,
  CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP,
  CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM,
  CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM:
W
wdenk 已提交
4625 4626 4627
		Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH)

- SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE,
4628 4629
  CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM,
  CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM:
W
wdenk 已提交
4630 4631
		Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM)

4632 4633
- CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA, CONFIG_SYS_MPTPR_2BK_4K, CONFIG_SYS_MPTPR_1BK_4K, CONFIG_SYS_MPTPR_2BK_8K,
  CONFIG_SYS_MPTPR_1BK_8K, CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_8COL, CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_9COL:
W
wdenk 已提交
4634 4635 4636
		Machine Mode Register and Memory Periodic Timer
		Prescaler definitions (SDRAM timing)

4637
- CONFIG_SYS_I2C_UCODE_PATCH, CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DPMEM_OFFSET [0x1FC0]:
W
wdenk 已提交
4638 4639 4640
		enable I2C microcode relocation patch (MPC8xx);
		define relocation offset in DPRAM [DSP2]

4641
- CONFIG_SYS_SMC_UCODE_PATCH, CONFIG_SYS_SMC_DPMEM_OFFSET [0x1FC0]:
4642 4643 4644
		enable SMC microcode relocation patch (MPC8xx);
		define relocation offset in DPRAM [SMC1]

4645
- CONFIG_SYS_SPI_UCODE_PATCH, CONFIG_SYS_SPI_DPMEM_OFFSET [0x1FC0]:
W
wdenk 已提交
4646 4647 4648
		enable SPI microcode relocation patch (MPC8xx);
		define relocation offset in DPRAM [SCC4]

4649
- CONFIG_SYS_USE_OSCCLK:
W
wdenk 已提交
4650 4651 4652 4653
		Use OSCM clock mode on MBX8xx board. Be careful,
		wrong setting might damage your board. Read
		doc/README.MBX before setting this variable!

4654
- CONFIG_SYS_CPM_POST_WORD_ADDR: (MPC8xx, MPC8260 only)
W
wdenk 已提交
4655 4656 4657 4658
		Offset of the bootmode word in DPRAM used by post
		(Power On Self Tests). This definition overrides
		#define'd default value in commproc.h resp.
		cpm_8260.h.
4659

4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 4665 4666 4667
- CONFIG_SYS_PCI_SLV_MEM_LOCAL, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_SLV_MEM_BUS, CONFIG_SYS_PICMR0_MASK_ATTRIB,
  CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR0_LOCAL, CONFIG_SYS_PCIMSK0_MASK, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR1_LOCAL,
  CONFIG_SYS_PCIMSK1_MASK, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEM_LOCAL, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEM_BUS,
  CONFIG_SYS_CPU_PCI_MEM_START, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEM_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_POCMR0_MASK_ATTRIB,
  CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEMIO_LOCAL, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEMIO_BUS, CPU_PCI_MEMIO_START,
  CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_MEMIO_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_POCMR1_MASK_ATTRIB, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_IO_LOCAL,
  CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_IO_BUS, CONFIG_SYS_CPU_PCI_IO_START, CONFIG_SYS_PCI_MSTR_IO_SIZE,
  CONFIG_SYS_POCMR2_MASK_ATTRIB: (MPC826x only)
S
Stefan Roese 已提交
4668
		Overrides the default PCI memory map in arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8260/pci.c if set.
W
wdenk 已提交
4669

4670 4671 4672 4673
- CONFIG_PCI_DISABLE_PCIE:
		Disable PCI-Express on systems where it is supported but not
		required.

4674
- CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY
4675
		Only scan through and get the devices on the buses.
4676 4677 4678 4679 4680
		Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or
		something has already done it, and we don't need to do it
		a second time.	Useful for platforms that are pre-booted
		by coreboot or similar.

4681 4682 4683
- CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE:
		Enable support for indirect PCI bridges.

4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIO:
		Chip has SRIO or not

- CONFIG_SRIO1:
		Board has SRIO 1 port available

- CONFIG_SRIO2:
		Board has SRIO 2 port available

4693 4694 4695
- CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER
		Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE

4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT:
		Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region

- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYS:
		Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region

- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE:
		Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region

4705 4706 4707 4708
- CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT
		Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using
		a 16 bit bus.
		Not all NAND drivers use this symbol.
4709
		Example of drivers that use it:
4710
		- drivers/mtd/nand/ndfc.c
4711
		- drivers/mtd/nand/mxc_nand.c
4712 4713 4714 4715 4716

- CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG
		Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined
		a default value will be used.

B
Ben Warren 已提交
4717
- CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM
4718 4719 4720
		Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common
		with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs

B
Ben Warren 已提交
4721 4722 4723
  SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS
		I2C address of the SPD EEPROM

4724
- CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
4725 4726 4727
		If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first
		one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve
		to something your driver can deal with.
B
Ben Warren 已提交
4728

4729 4730 4731 4732 4733 4734
- CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING
		Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with
		soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing
		parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into
		header files or board specific files.

4735 4736 4737
- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE
		Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr.

Y
York Sun 已提交
4738 4739 4740
- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH
		Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers.

4741 4742 4743
- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST
		Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers.

4744
- CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0
4745 4746
		Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should
		be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3.
4747

4748 4749 4750 4751 4752
- CONFIG_ETHER_ON_FEC[12]
		Define to enable FEC[12] on a 8xx series processor.

- CONFIG_FEC[12]_PHY
		Define to the hardcoded PHY address which corresponds
W
wdenk 已提交
4753 4754
		to the given FEC; i. e.
			#define CONFIG_FEC1_PHY 4
4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767
		means that the PHY with address 4 is connected to FEC1

		When set to -1, means to probe for first available.

- CONFIG_FEC[12]_PHY_NORXERR
		The PHY does not have a RXERR line (RMII only).
		(so program the FEC to ignore it).

- CONFIG_RMII
		Enable RMII mode for all FECs.
		Note that this is a global option, we can't
		have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode.

4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 4777
- CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY
		Add a verify option to the crc32 command.
		The syntax is:

		=> crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32>

		Where address/count indicate a memory area
		and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the
		area should have.

W
wdenk 已提交
4778 4779
- CONFIG_LOOPW
		Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if
4780
		the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEM).
W
wdenk 已提交
4781

S
stroese 已提交
4782 4783 4784 4785 4786
- CONFIG_MX_CYCLIC
		Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic
		"md/mw" commands.
		Examples:

W
wdenk 已提交
4787
		=> mdc.b 10 4 500
S
stroese 已提交
4788 4789
		This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms.

W
wdenk 已提交
4790
		=> mwc.l 100 12345678 10
S
stroese 已提交
4791 4792
		This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms.

W
wdenk 已提交
4793
		This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated
4794
		globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEM).
S
stroese 已提交
4795

W
wdenk 已提交
4796
- CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT
4797
		[ARM, NDS32, MIPS only] If this variable is defined, then certain
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
4798 4799 4800 4801 4802 4803 4804 4805
		low level initializations (like setting up the memory
		controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not
		relocate itself into RAM.

		Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only
		exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some
		other boot loader or by a debugger which performs
		these initializations itself.
W
wdenk 已提交
4806

4807 4808 4809 4810 4811
- CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT_ONLY
		[ARM926EJ-S only] This allows just the call to lowlevel_init()
		to be skipped. The normal CPU15 init (such as enabling the
		instruction cache) is still performed.

4812
- CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
4813 4814 4815
		Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader
		that is executed before the actual U-Boot. E.g. when
		compiling a NAND SPL.
W
wdenk 已提交
4816

4817 4818 4819 4820 4821
- CONFIG_TPL_BUILD
		Modifies the behaviour of start.S  when compiling a loader
		that is executed after the SPL and before the actual U-Boot.
		It is loaded by the SPL.

4822 4823 4824 4825 4826
- CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC
		Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section
		.resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the
		previous 4k of the .text section.

4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835
- CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM
		Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses
		effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard
		U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated
		to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since
		it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all
		addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses
		to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem().

4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841
- CONFIG_USE_ARCH_MEMCPY
  CONFIG_USE_ARCH_MEMSET
		If these options are used a optimized version of memcpy/memset will
		be used if available. These functions may be faster under some
		conditions but may increase the binary size.

4842 4843 4844
- CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR
		If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not
		needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot.
4845

4846 4847 4848 4849
- CONFIG_SYS_MPUCLK
		Defines the MPU clock speed (in MHz).

		NOTE : currently only supported on AM335x platforms.
4850

4851 4852 4853
- CONFIG_SPL_AM33XX_ENABLE_RTC32K_OSC:
		Enables the RTC32K OSC on AM33xx based plattforms

4854 4855 4856 4857 4858
- CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE
		Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver
		driver that uses this:
		drivers/mtd/nand/davinci_nand.c

4859 4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867
Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support:
-----------------------------------

The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the
loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format.
This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
within that device.

4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874
- CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR
	The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located.  The
	meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro
	is also specified.

- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR
	The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located.  The
4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 4900
	meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro
	is also specified.

- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH
	The maximum possible size of the firmware.  The firmware binary format
	has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it
	might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some
	local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first.

- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR
	Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as
	normal addressable memory via the LBC.  CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the
	virtual address in NOR flash.

- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND
	Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash.
	CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash.

- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC
	Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC
	device.  CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device.

- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_SPIFLASH
	Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SPI
	device.  CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device.

4901 4902 4903
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE
	Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master)
	memory space.	CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which
4904 4905 4906
	can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound
	window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in
	master's memory space.
4907

4908 4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 4923 4924 4925 4926 4927 4928 4929 4930 4931 4932 4933 4934
Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support:
---------------------------------------------------------
The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of
"firmware".
This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
within that device.

- CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET
	Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs.

- CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_ADDR
	The address in the storage device where the firmware is located.  The
	meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_IN_xxx macro
	is also specified.

- CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_LENGTH
	The maximum possible size of the firmware.  The firmware binary format
	has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it
	might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some
	local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first.

- CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_IN_NOR
	Specifies that MC firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as
	normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_LS_MC_FW_ADDR is the
	virtual address in NOR flash.

4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 4941 4942 4943 4944 4945 4946
Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support:
-------------------------------------------
The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of
"Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom.
This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting.

- CONFIG_FSL_DEBUG_SERVER
	Enable the Debug Server for Layerscape SoCs.

- CONFIG_SYS_DEBUG_SERVER_DRAM_BLOCK_MIN_SIZE
	Define minimum DDR size required for debug server image

4947 4948
- CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN
	Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires
4949

4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 4958 4959 4960 4961
Reproducible builds
-------------------

In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build
process have to be set to a fixed value.

This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable.
SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration
option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot.

SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC.

W
wdenk 已提交
4962 4963 4964
Building the Software:
======================

4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970
Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments
and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support
all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all
(potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we
recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK)
which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot.
W
wdenk 已提交
4971

4972 4973 4974 4975 4976
If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you
have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case,
you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell.
Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are
necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter:
W
wdenk 已提交
4977

4978 4979
	$ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx-
	$ export CROSS_COMPILE
W
wdenk 已提交
4980

4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990
Note: If you wish to generate Windows versions of the utilities in
      the tools directory you can use the MinGW toolchain
      (http://www.mingw.org).  Set your HOST tools to the MinGW
      toolchain and execute 'make tools'.  For example:

       $ make HOSTCC=i586-mingw32msvc-gcc HOSTSTRIP=i586-mingw32msvc-strip tools

      Binaries such as tools/mkimage.exe will be created which can
      be executed on computers running Windows.

4991 4992
U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the
sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This
W
wdenk 已提交
4993 4994
is done by typing:

4995
	make NAME_defconfig
W
wdenk 已提交
4996

4997
where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu-
4998
rations; see boards.cfg for supported names.
4999

W
wdenk 已提交
5000 5001 5002 5003
Note: for some board special configuration names may exist; check if
      additional information is available from the board vendor; for
      instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard)
      or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features"
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
5004
      when choosing the configuration, i. e.
W
wdenk 已提交
5005

5006
      make TQM823L_defconfig
W
wdenk 已提交
5007 5008
	- will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support

5009
      make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig
W
wdenk 已提交
5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021
	- will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD

      etc.


Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot
images ready for download to / installation on your system:

- "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image
- "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format
- "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format

5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028
By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved
in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change
this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory:

1. Add O= to the make command line invocations:

	make O=/tmp/build distclean
5029
	make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig
5030 5031
	make O=/tmp/build all

5032
2. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location:
5033

5034
	export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build
5035
	make distclean
5036
	make NAME_defconfig
5037 5038
	make all

5039
Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment
5040 5041
variable.

W
wdenk 已提交
5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051

Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so
for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of
native "make".


If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need
to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these
steps:

5052
1.  Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any
W
wdenk 已提交
5053
    files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least
5054 5055 5056
    the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c".
2.  Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for
    your board.
W
wdenk 已提交
5057 5058
3.  If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new
    directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need.
5059
4.  Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name.
W
wdenk 已提交
5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 5066 5067 5068
5.  Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file
    to be installed on your target system.
6.  Debug and solve any problems that might arise.
    [Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.]


Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.:
==============================================================

5069 5070
If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board
or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to
W
wdenk 已提交
5071 5072
provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes
the form of a "patch", i. e. a context diff against a certain (latest
5073
official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources.
W
wdenk 已提交
5074

5075 5076
But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi-
cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of
W
wdenk 已提交
5077 5078
the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so,
just run the "MAKEALL" script, which will configure and build U-Boot
5079 5080 5081 5082
for ALL supported system. Be warned, this will take a while. You can
select which (cross) compiler to use by passing a `CROSS_COMPILE'
environment variable to the script, i. e. to use the ELDK cross tools
you can type
W
wdenk 已提交
5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089

	CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_8xx- MAKEALL

or to build on a native PowerPC system you can type

	CROSS_COMPILE=' ' MAKEALL

5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 5095 5096
When using the MAKEALL script, the default behaviour is to build
U-Boot in the source directory. This location can be changed by
setting the BUILD_DIR environment variable. Also, for each target
built, the MAKEALL script saves two log files (<target>.ERR and
<target>.MAKEALL) in the <source dir>/LOG directory. This default
location can be changed by setting the MAKEALL_LOGDIR environment
variable. For example:
5097 5098 5099 5100 5101

	export BUILD_DIR=/tmp/build
	export MAKEALL_LOGDIR=/tmp/log
	CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_8xx- MAKEALL

5102 5103 5104
With the above settings build objects are saved in the /tmp/build,
log files are saved in the /tmp/log and the source tree remains clean
during the whole build process.
5105 5106


W
wdenk 已提交
5107 5108 5109 5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 5116
See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below.


Monitor Commands - Overview:
============================

go	- start application at address 'addr'
run	- run commands in an environment variable
bootm	- boot application image from memory
bootp	- boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol
5117
bootz   - boot zImage from memory
W
wdenk 已提交
5118 5119 5120
tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol
	       and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip"
	       (and eventually "gatewayip")
S
Simon Glass 已提交
5121
tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol
W
wdenk 已提交
5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 5128 5129 5130 5131 5132
rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol
diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd   - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd'
loads	- load S-Record file over serial line
loadb	- load binary file over serial line (kermit mode)
md	- memory display
mm	- memory modify (auto-incrementing)
nm	- memory modify (constant address)
mw	- memory write (fill)
cp	- memory copy
cmp	- memory compare
crc32	- checksum calculation
5133
i2c	- I2C sub-system
W
wdenk 已提交
5134 5135 5136 5137 5138 5139 5140 5141
sspi	- SPI utility commands
base	- print or set address offset
printenv- print environment variables
setenv	- set environment variables
saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage
protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection
erase	- erase FLASH memory
flinfo	- print FLASH memory information
5142
nand	- NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand)
W
wdenk 已提交
5143 5144 5145 5146 5147
bdinfo	- print Board Info structure
iminfo	- print header information for application image
coninfo - print console devices and informations
ide	- IDE sub-system
loop	- infinite loop on address range
W
wdenk 已提交
5148
loopw	- infinite write loop on address range
W
wdenk 已提交
5149 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171
mtest	- simple RAM test
icache	- enable or disable instruction cache
dcache	- enable or disable data cache
reset	- Perform RESET of the CPU
echo	- echo args to console
version - print monitor version
help	- print online help
?	- alias for 'help'


Monitor Commands - Detailed Description:
========================================

TODO.

For now: just type "help <command>".


Environment Variables:
======================

U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which
can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory.
W
wdenk 已提交
5172

W
wdenk 已提交
5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178
Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using
"printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv"
without a value can be used to delete a variable from the
environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are
working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the
environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided.
W
wdenk 已提交
5179

5180 5181 5182
Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables.

List of environment variables (most likely not complete):
W
wdenk 已提交
5183

W
wdenk 已提交
5184
  baudrate	- see CONFIG_BAUDRATE
W
wdenk 已提交
5185

W
wdenk 已提交
5186
  bootdelay	- see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
W
wdenk 已提交
5187

W
wdenk 已提交
5188
  bootcmd	- see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
W
wdenk 已提交
5189

W
wdenk 已提交
5190
  bootargs	- Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image
W
wdenk 已提交
5191

W
wdenk 已提交
5192
  bootfile	- Name of the image to load with TFTP
W
wdenk 已提交
5193

5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199
  bootm_low	- Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
		  command can be restricted. This variable is given as
		  a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed
		  for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size"
		  environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is
		  also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux
5200 5201 5202
		  kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and
		  bootm_mapsize.

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
5203
  bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel.
5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209
		  This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it
		  defines the size of the memory region starting at base
		  address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel
		  during early boot.  If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used
		  as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is
		  used otherwise.
5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216

  bootm_size	- Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
		  command can be restricted. This variable is given as
		  a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region
		  allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low"
		  environment variable.

5217 5218 5219 5220
  updatefile	- Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used
		  by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to
		  documentation in doc/README.update for more details.

W
wdenk 已提交
5221 5222 5223 5224
  autoload	- if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'),
		  "bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the
		  configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to
		  load any image using TFTP
W
wdenk 已提交
5225

W
wdenk 已提交
5226 5227 5228 5229
  autostart	- if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp",
		  "rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will
		  be automatically started (by internally calling
		  "bootm")
5230

W
wdenk 已提交
5231 5232 5233 5234 5235
		  If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the
		  "bootm" command will be copied to the load address
		  (and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started.
		  This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary
		  data.
W
wdenk 已提交
5236

5237 5238
  fdt_high	- if set this restricts the maximum address that the
		  flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot.
5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246
		  For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory
		  at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel
		  only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you
		  may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the
		  device tree blob be copied to the maximum address
		  of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can
		  access it during the boot procedure.

5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253
		  If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then
		  the fdt will not be copied at all on boot.  For this
		  to work it must reside in writable memory, have
		  sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to
		  add the information it needs into it, and the memory
		  must be accessible by the kernel.

5254 5255 5256 5257
  fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened
		  device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is
		  defined.

W
wdenk 已提交
5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263
  i2cfast	- (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only)
		  if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast
		  mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in
		  initialization code. So, for changes to be effective
		  it must be saved and board must be reset.

W
wdenk 已提交
5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269
  initrd_high	- restrict positioning of initrd images:
		  If this variable is not set, initrd images will be
		  copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this
		  is usually what you want since it allows for
		  maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to
		  make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the
5270
		  CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment
W
wdenk 已提交
5271 5272 5273 5274
		  variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0".
		  Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper
		  address to use (U-Boot will still check that it
		  does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data).
W
wdenk 已提交
5275

W
wdenk 已提交
5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281
		  For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB
		  RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux,
		  you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of
		  the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make
		  sure that the initrd image is placed in the first
		  12 MB as well - this can be done with
W
wdenk 已提交
5282

W
wdenk 已提交
5283
		  setenv initrd_high 00c00000
W
wdenk 已提交
5284

W
wdenk 已提交
5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 5290 5291
		  If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an
		  indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal
		  for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash
		  memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the
		  ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the
		  boot time on your system, but requires that this
		  feature is supported by your Linux kernel.
W
wdenk 已提交
5292

W
wdenk 已提交
5293
  ipaddr	- IP address; needed for tftpboot command
W
wdenk 已提交
5294

W
wdenk 已提交
5295 5296
  loadaddr	- Default load address for commands like "bootp",
		  "rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot"
W
wdenk 已提交
5297

W
wdenk 已提交
5298
  loads_echo	- see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
5299

W
wdenk 已提交
5300
  serverip	- TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command
5301

W
wdenk 已提交
5302
  bootretry	- see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME
5303

W
wdenk 已提交
5304
  bootdelaykey	- see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR
5305

W
wdenk 已提交
5306
  bootstopkey	- see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR
W
wdenk 已提交
5307

M
Mike Frysinger 已提交
5308
  ethprime	- controls which interface is used first.
W
wdenk 已提交
5309

M
Mike Frysinger 已提交
5310 5311
  ethact	- controls which interface is currently active.
		  For example you can do the following
W
wdenk 已提交
5312

5313 5314 5315 5316
		  => setenv ethact FEC
		  => ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC
		  => setenv ethact SCC
		  => ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC
W
wdenk 已提交
5317

5318 5319 5320 5321
  ethrotate	- When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all
		  available network interfaces.
		  It just stays at the currently selected interface.

5322
  netretry	- When set to "no" each network operation will
W
wdenk 已提交
5323 5324 5325 5326 5327 5328
		  either succeed or fail without retrying.
		  When set to "once" the network operation will
		  fail when all the available network interfaces
		  are tried once without success.
		  Useful on scripts which control the retry operation
		  themselves.
W
wdenk 已提交
5329

5330
  npe_ucode	- set load address for the NPE microcode
5331

5332
  silent_linux  - If set then Linux will be told to boot silently, by
5333 5334 5335 5336 5337
		  changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be
		  made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If
		  unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console
		  is silent.

5338
  tftpsrcp	- If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's
5339 5340
		  UDP source port.

5341
  tftpdstp	- If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP
5342 5343
		  destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69.

5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354
  tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set,
		  we use the TFTP server's default block size

  tftptimeout	- Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli-
		  seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines
		  when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to
		  be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds.
		  Lowering this value may make downloads succeed
		  faster in networks with high packet loss rates or
		  with unreliable TFTP servers.

5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362
  tftptimeoutcountmax	- maximum count of TFTP timeouts (no
		  unit, minimum value = 0). Defines how many timeouts
		  can happen during a single file transfer before that
		  transfer is aborted. The default is 10, and 0 means
		  'no timeouts allowed'. Increasing this value may help
		  downloads succeed with high packet loss rates, or with
		  unreliable TFTP servers or client hardware.

5363
  vlan		- When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
5364
		  Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q
W
wdenk 已提交
5365
		  VLAN tagged frames.
W
wdenk 已提交
5366

5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372
  bootpretryperiod	- Period during which BOOTP/DHCP sends retries.
		  Unsigned value, in milliseconds. If not set, the period will
		  be either the default (28000), or a value based on
		  CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT, if defined. This value has
		  precedence over the valu based on CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT.

5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381
The following image location variables contain the location of images
used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is
not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment
variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP
server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be
loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR
flash or offset in NAND flash.

*Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some
F
Fabio Estevam 已提交
5382
boards currently use other variables for these purposes, and some
5383 5384
boards use these variables for other purposes.

W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390
Image		    File Name	     RAM Address       Flash Location
-----		    ---------	     -----------       --------------
u-boot		    u-boot	     u-boot_addr_r     u-boot_addr
Linux kernel	    bootfile	     kernel_addr_r     kernel_addr
device tree blob    fdtfile	     fdt_addr_r	       fdt_addr
ramdisk		    ramdiskfile	     ramdisk_addr_r    ramdisk_addr
5391

W
wdenk 已提交
5392 5393 5394
The following environment variables may be used and automatically
updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"),
depending the information provided by your boot server:
W
wdenk 已提交
5395

W
wdenk 已提交
5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404
  bootfile	- see above
  dnsip		- IP address of your Domain Name Server
  dnsip2	- IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server
  gatewayip	- IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use
  hostname	- Target hostname
  ipaddr	- see above
  netmask	- Subnet Mask
  rootpath	- Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server
  serverip	- see above
5405 5406


W
wdenk 已提交
5407
There are two special Environment Variables:
5408

W
wdenk 已提交
5409 5410 5411
  serial#	- contains hardware identification information such
		  as type string and/or serial number
  ethaddr	- Ethernet address
W
wdenk 已提交
5412

W
wdenk 已提交
5413 5414 5415
These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of
the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables
once they have been set once.
W
wdenk 已提交
5416

5417

W
wdenk 已提交
5418
Further special Environment Variables:
5419

W
wdenk 已提交
5420 5421 5422
  ver		- Contains the U-Boot version string as printed
		  with the "version" command. This variable is
		  readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE).
5423 5424


W
wdenk 已提交
5425 5426
Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take
only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-).
5427 5428


5429 5430 5431 5432
Callback functions for environment variables:
---------------------------------------------

For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change
5433
when their values are changed.  This functionality allows functions to
5434 5435 5436 5437 5438 5439 5440 5441 5442 5443 5444 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5452 5453 5454 5455
be associated with arbitrary variables.  On creation, overwrite, or
deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side
effect to happen or for the change to be rejected.

The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the
U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code.

These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways.  The
static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC
in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of
associations.  The list must be in the following format:

	entry = variable_name[:callback_name]
	list = entry[,list]

If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted.
Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list.

Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable
with the same list format above.  Any association in ".callbacks" will
override any association in the static list. You can define
CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the
5456
".callbacks" environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
5457

5458 5459 5460 5461
If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
regular expression. This allows multiple variables to be connected to
the same callback without explicitly listing them all out.

5462

W
wdenk 已提交
5463 5464
Command Line Parsing:
=====================
5465

W
wdenk 已提交
5466 5467
There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot:
the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell:
W
wdenk 已提交
5468

W
wdenk 已提交
5469 5470
Old, simple command line parser:
--------------------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
5471

W
wdenk 已提交
5472 5473
- supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands)
- several commands on one line, separated by ';'
5474
- variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax
W
wdenk 已提交
5475 5476
- special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\',
  for example:
5477
	setenv bootcmd bootm \${address}
W
wdenk 已提交
5478 5479
- You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example:
	setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off'
W
wdenk 已提交
5480

W
wdenk 已提交
5481 5482
Hush shell:
-----------
W
wdenk 已提交
5483

W
wdenk 已提交
5484 5485 5486 5487 5488 5489 5490 5491 5492 5493
- similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like
  if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done,
  until...do...done, ...
- supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv
  commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax
  "name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run"
  command

General rules:
--------------
W
wdenk 已提交
5494

W
wdenk 已提交
5495 5496 5497 5498
(1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run"
    command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and
    one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be
    executed anyway.
W
wdenk 已提交
5499

W
wdenk 已提交
5500
(2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e.
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
5501
    calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing
W
wdenk 已提交
5502 5503
    command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining
    variables are not executed.
W
wdenk 已提交
5504

W
wdenk 已提交
5505 5506
Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces:
=======================================
W
wdenk 已提交
5507

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
5508
Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports
W
wdenk 已提交
5509 5510
such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a
"working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows:
W
wdenk 已提交
5511

W
wdenk 已提交
5512 5513 5514
Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding
MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0),
"eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ...
W
wdenk 已提交
5515

W
wdenk 已提交
5516 5517 5518 5519
If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance
in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon-
ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment
variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means:
W
wdenk 已提交
5520

W
wdenk 已提交
5521 5522
o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the
  environment, the SROM's address is used.
W
wdenk 已提交
5523

W
wdenk 已提交
5524 5525 5526
o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the
  environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is
  used.
W
wdenk 已提交
5527

W
wdenk 已提交
5528 5529
o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and
  both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used.
W
wdenk 已提交
5530

W
wdenk 已提交
5531 5532 5533
o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the
  addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a
  warning is printed.
W
wdenk 已提交
5534

W
wdenk 已提交
5535
o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error
5536 5537
  is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case
  a random, locally-assigned MAC is used.
W
wdenk 已提交
5538

5539
If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
5540
will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process.	 This
5541 5542 5543
may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable.
The naming convention is as follows:
"ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc.
W
wdenk 已提交
5544

W
wdenk 已提交
5545 5546
Image Formats:
==============
W
wdenk 已提交
5547

5548 5549 5550 5551 5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 5565
U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on)
images in two formats:

New uImage format (FIT)
-----------------------

Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar
to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple
components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by
SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory.


Old uImage format
-----------------

Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything,
preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for
details; basically, the header defines the following image properties:
W
wdenk 已提交
5566

W
wdenk 已提交
5567 5568
* Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD,
  4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks,
5569 5570 5571
  LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY;
  Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS,
  INTEGRITY).
W
Wolfgang Denk 已提交
5572
* Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, AVR32, Intel x86,
5573 5574
  IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit;
  Currently supported: ARM, AVR32, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC).
W
wdenk 已提交
5575 5576 5577 5578 5579
* Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2)
* Load Address
* Entry Point
* Image Name
* Image Timestamp
W
wdenk 已提交
5580

W
wdenk 已提交
5581 5582 5583
The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header
and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by
CRC32 checksums.
W
wdenk 已提交
5584 5585


W
wdenk 已提交
5586 5587
Linux Support:
==============
W
wdenk 已提交
5588

W
wdenk 已提交
5589 5590 5591
Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application
easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of
U-Boot.
W
wdenk 已提交
5592

W
wdenk 已提交
5593 5594 5595 5596 5597
U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some
special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any
"initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image;
instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation
serves several purposes:
W
wdenk 已提交
5598

W
wdenk 已提交
5599 5600 5601
- the same features can be used for other OS or standalone
  applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the
  Flash memory footprint)
W
wdenk 已提交
5602

W
wdenk 已提交
5603 5604
- it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because
  lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot
W
wdenk 已提交
5605

W
wdenk 已提交
5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611
- the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd"
  images; of course this also means that different kernel images can
  be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't
  have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just
  change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the
  software is easier now.
W
wdenk 已提交
5612 5613


W
wdenk 已提交
5614 5615
Linux HOWTO:
============
W
wdenk 已提交
5616

W
wdenk 已提交
5617 5618
Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems:
---------------------------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
5619

W
wdenk 已提交
5620 5621 5622 5623
U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to
configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware
(no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to
Linux :-).
W
wdenk 已提交
5624

S
Stefan Roese 已提交
5625
But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot).
5626

W
wdenk 已提交
5627 5628
Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance
include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board
5629 5630
Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h,
and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value
5631
as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR.
5632

5633 5634 5635 5636 5637
Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers.
If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there
is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See
doc/driver-model.

W
wdenk 已提交
5638

W
wdenk 已提交
5639 5640
Configuring the Linux kernel:
-----------------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
5641

W
wdenk 已提交
5642 5643 5644 5645 5646 5647
No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root
device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system.


Building a Linux Image:
-----------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
5648

W
wdenk 已提交
5649 5650 5651 5652 5653 5654 5655 5656 5657
With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are
not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target
"uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by
U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target,
which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a
100% compatible format.

Example:

5658
	make TQM850L_defconfig
W
wdenk 已提交
5659 5660 5661 5662 5663 5664 5665 5666 5667 5668 5669 5670 5671 5672 5673 5674 5675 5676 5677 5678 5679 5680 5681 5682 5683
	make oldconfig
	make dep
	make uImage

The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to
encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header	 information,
CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing:

* build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format):

* convert the kernel into a raw binary image:

	${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \
				 -R .note -R .comment \
				 -S vmlinux linux.bin

* compress the binary image:

	gzip -9 linux.bin

* package compressed binary image for U-Boot:

	mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \
		-a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \
		-d linux.bin.gz uImage
W
wdenk 已提交
5684 5685


W
wdenk 已提交
5686 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 5692 5693 5694 5695 5696 5697 5698
The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use
with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or
combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64
byte header containing information about target architecture,
operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time
stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc.

"mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and
print the header information, or to build new images.

In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information
contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes
checksum verification:
W
wdenk 已提交
5699

W
wdenk 已提交
5700 5701 5702 5703 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708 5709 5710 5711 5712 5713 5714 5715 5716
	tools/mkimage -l image
	  -l ==> list image header information

The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image
from a "data file" which is used as image payload:

	tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \
		      -n name -d data_file image
	  -A ==> set architecture to 'arch'
	  -O ==> set operating system to 'os'
	  -T ==> set image type to 'type'
	  -C ==> set compression type 'comp'
	  -a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex)
	  -e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex)
	  -n ==> set image name to 'name'
	  -d ==> use image data from 'datafile'

W
wdenk 已提交
5717 5718 5719
Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load
address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the
kernel version:
W
wdenk 已提交
5720 5721 5722 5723 5724 5725 5726 5727

- 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C,
- 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000.

So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read:

	-> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
	> -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \
S
Stefan Roese 已提交
5728
	> -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \
W
wdenk 已提交
5729 5730 5731 5732 5733 5734 5735 5736 5737 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749 5750 5751
	> examples/uImage.TQM850L
	Image Name:   2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
	Created:      Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
	Image Type:   PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
	Data Size:    335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
	Load Address: 0x00000000
	Entry Point:  0x00000000

To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption):

	-> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L
	Image Name:   2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
	Created:      Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
	Image Type:   PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
	Data Size:    335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
	Load Address: 0x00000000
	Entry Point:  0x00000000

NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade
speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this
needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not
need to be uncompressed:

S
Stefan Roese 已提交
5752
	-> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz
W
wdenk 已提交
5753 5754
	-> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
	> -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \
S
Stefan Roese 已提交
5755
	> -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \
W
wdenk 已提交
5756 5757 5758 5759 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 5765 5766 5767 5768 5769 5770 5771 5772 5773 5774 5775 5776 5777
	> examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed
	Image Name:   2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
	Created:      Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
	Image Type:   PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed)
	Data Size:    792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB
	Load Address: 0x00000000
	Entry Point:  0x00000000


Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file
when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk:

	-> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \
	> -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \
	> -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd
	Image Name:   Simple Ramdisk Image
	Created:      Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000
	Image Type:   PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
	Data Size:    566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB
	Load Address: 0x00000000
	Entry Point:  0x00000000

5778 5779 5780 5781 5782
The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i"
option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d"
option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file"
from the image:

5783 5784 5785 5786
	tools/dumpimage -i image -T type -p position data_file
	  -i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file'
	  -T ==> set image type to 'type'
	  -p ==> 'position' (starting at 0) of the 'data_file' inside the 'image'
5787

W
wdenk 已提交
5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 5809 5810 5811 5812 5813 5814 5815 5816 5817 5818 5819 5820 5821 5822

Installing a Linux Image:
-------------------------

To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface,
you must convert the image to S-Record format:

	objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec

The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot
image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to
address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to
specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads'
command.

Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the
TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank):

	=> erase 40100000 401FFFFF

	.......... done
	Erased 8 sectors

	=> loads 40100000
	## Ready for S-Record download ...
	~>examples/image.srec
	1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...
	...
	15989 15990 15991 15992
	[file transfer complete]
	[connected]
	## Start Addr = 0x00000000


You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command;
5823
this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data
W
wdenk 已提交
5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 5850 5851 5852 5853 5854 5855 5856 5857 5858 5859 5860 5861 5862 5863 5864 5865 5866 5867 5868 5869 5870
corruption happened:

	=> imi 40100000

	## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
	   Image Name:	 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
	   Image Type:	 PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
	   Data Size:	 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
	   Load Address: 00000000
	   Entry Point:	 0000000c
	   Verifying Checksum ... OK


Boot Linux:
-----------

The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in
memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents
of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as
parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the
"printenv" and "setenv" commands:


	=> printenv bootargs
	bootargs=root=/dev/ram

	=> setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2

	=> printenv bootargs
	bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2

	=> bootm 40020000
	## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ...
	   Image Name:	 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L
	   Image Type:	 PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
	   Data Size:	 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB
	   Load Address: 00000000
	   Entry Point:	 0000000c
	   Verifying Checksum ... OK
	   Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
	Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000
	Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
	time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
	Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
	Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000]
	...

M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
5871
If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass
W
wdenk 已提交
5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 5878 5879 5880 5881 5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 5895 5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 5917 5918 5919
the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT
format!) to the "bootm" command:

	=> imi 40100000 40200000

	## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
	   Image Name:	 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
	   Image Type:	 PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
	   Data Size:	 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
	   Load Address: 00000000
	   Entry Point:	 0000000c
	   Verifying Checksum ... OK

	## Checking Image at 40200000 ...
	   Image Name:	 Simple Ramdisk Image
	   Image Type:	 PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
	   Data Size:	 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
	   Load Address: 00000000
	   Entry Point:	 00000000
	   Verifying Checksum ... OK

	=> bootm 40100000 40200000
	## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ...
	   Image Name:	 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
	   Image Type:	 PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
	   Data Size:	 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
	   Load Address: 00000000
	   Entry Point:	 0000000c
	   Verifying Checksum ... OK
	   Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
	## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ...
	   Image Name:	 Simple Ramdisk Image
	   Image Type:	 PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
	   Data Size:	 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
	   Load Address: 00000000
	   Entry Point:	 00000000
	   Verifying Checksum ... OK
	   Loading Ramdisk ... OK
	Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000
	Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram
	time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
	Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
	...
	RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0
	VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem).

	bash#

5920 5921 5922 5923 5924 5925 5926 5927 5928 5929 5930 5931 5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 5944 5945 5946 5947 5948 5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955
Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree:
-----------

First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section
titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The
following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated
flat device tree:

=> print oftaddr
oftaddr=0x300000
=> print oft
oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb
=> tftp $oftaddr $oft
Speed: 1000, full duplex
Using TSEC0 device
TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101
Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'.
Load address: 0x300000
Loading: #
done
Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex)
=> tftp $loadaddr $bootfile
Speed: 1000, full duplex
Using TSEC0 device
TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2
Filename 'uImage'.
Load address: 0x200000
Loading:############
done
Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex)
=> print loadaddr
loadaddr=200000
=> print oftaddr
oftaddr=0x300000
=> bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr
## Booting image at 00200000 ...
5956 5957 5958
   Image Name:	 Linux-2.6.17-dirty
   Image Type:	 PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
   Data Size:	 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB
5959
   Load Address: 00000000
5960
   Entry Point:	 00000000
5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 5968
   Verifying Checksum ... OK
   Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000
Using MPC85xx ADS machine description
Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb
[snip]


W
wdenk 已提交
5969 5970 5971 5972 5973 5974 5975 5976 5977 5978 5979 5980 5981 5982 5983 5984 5985 5986 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008
More About U-Boot Image Types:
------------------------------

U-Boot supports the following image types:

   "Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment
	provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave
	well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from
	the Standalone Program.
   "OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which
	will take over control completely. Usually these programs
	will install their own set of exception handlers, device
	drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot
	expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU.
   "RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their
	parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is
	being started.
   "Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS
	(Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like
	RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want
	to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot
	server provides just a single image file, but you want to get
	for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image.

	"Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each
	image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network
	byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0".
	Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by
	one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to
	a multiple of 4 bytes).

   "Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like
	U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to
	flash memory.

   "Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by
	U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially
	useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush)
	as command interpreter.

6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015
Booting the Linux zImage:
-------------------------

On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done
using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same
as the syntax of "bootm" command.

6016
Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply
6017 6018 6019 6020
kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the
address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following
format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>".

W
wdenk 已提交
6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 6081 6082 6083 6084 6085 6086 6087 6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 6094 6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117

Standalone HOWTO:
=================

One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and
run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of
U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services.

Two simple examples are included with the sources:

"Hello World" Demo:
-------------------

'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo
application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot.
It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it
like that:

	=> loads
	## Ready for S-Record download ...
	~>examples/hello_world.srec
	1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
	[file transfer complete]
	[connected]
	## Start Addr = 0x00040004

	=> go 40004 Hello World! This is a test.
	## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
	Hello World
	argc = 7
	argv[0] = "40004"
	argv[1] = "Hello"
	argv[2] = "World!"
	argv[3] = "This"
	argv[4] = "is"
	argv[5] = "a"
	argv[6] = "test."
	argv[7] = "<NULL>"
	Hit any key to exit ...

	## Application terminated, rc = 0x0

Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt
handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'.
Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second.
The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.'
character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be
controlled by the following keys:

	? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers
	b - enable interrupts and start timer
	e - stop timer and disable interrupts
	q - quit application

	=> loads
	## Ready for S-Record download ...
	~>examples/timer.srec
	1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
	[file transfer complete]
	[connected]
	## Start Addr = 0x00040004

	=> go 40004
	## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
	TIMERS=0xfff00980
	Using timer 1
	  tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0

Hit 'b':
	[q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us
	Enabling timer
Hit '?':
	[q, b, e, ?] ........
	tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0
Hit '?':
	[q, b, e, ?] .
	tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0
Hit '?':
	[q, b, e, ?] .
	tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0
Hit '?':
	[q, b, e, ?] .
	tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0
Hit 'e':
	[q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer
Hit 'q':
	[q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0


Minicom warning:
================

Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the
"minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd)
consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under
Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and
especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and
K
Karl O. Pinc 已提交
6118 6119 6120 6121
use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command).  See
http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3.
for help with kermit.

W
wdenk 已提交
6122 6123 6124 6125 6126 6127 6128 6129 6130 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6147 6148 6149 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156

Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this
configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section:

	   Name	   Program			Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi
	X  kermit  /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s	 Y    U	   Y	   N	  N
	Y  kermit  /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r	 N    D	   Y	   N	  N


NetBSD Notes:
=============

Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host
(build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx).

Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on
NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also
need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make).
Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files;
attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is
missing.  This file has to be installed and patched manually:

	# cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include
	# mkdir powerpc
	# ln -s powerpc machine
	# cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h
	# ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h	## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST

Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native
and U-Boot include files.

Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a
stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel
proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source
tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the
W
wdenk 已提交
6157
meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz
W
wdenk 已提交
6158 6159 6160 6161 6162 6163 6164 6165 6166 6167 6168 6169 6170 6171 6172 6173 6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 6180 6181 6182


Implementation Internals:
=========================

The following is not intended to be a complete description of every
implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the
inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom
hardware.


Initial Stack, Global Data:
---------------------------

The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot
starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to
system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet).
This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS
is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working
at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation
options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU
models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and
MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be
locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc.

6183
	Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the
6184
	U-Boot mailing list:
W
wdenk 已提交
6185 6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195

	Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)?
	From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com>
	Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET)
	...

	Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it
	is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not
	require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness
	is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of
	necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
6196
	beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you
W
wdenk 已提交
6197 6198 6199 6200 6201
	can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and
	operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals.

	OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It
	is another option for the system designer to use as an
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
6202
	initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either
W
wdenk 已提交
6203 6204 6205 6206 6207
	option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your
	board designers haven't used it for something that would
	cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not
	used.

6208
	CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere
W
wdenk 已提交
6209 6210
	with your processor/board/system design. The default value
	you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in
6211
	walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger
W
wdenk 已提交
6212 6213 6214 6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226
	than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set
	it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources
	that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in
	start.S has been around a while and should work as is when
	you get the config right.

	-Chris Hallinan
	DS4.COM, Inc.

It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C
code for the initialization procedures:

* Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt
  to write it.

6227
* Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized
W
wdenk 已提交
6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234
  as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali-
  zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM).

* Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like
  that.

Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use
6235
normal global data to share information between the code. But it
W
wdenk 已提交
6236 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 6242 6243 6244 6245 6246 6247 6248 6249
turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly
simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all
functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_
functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of
the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we
place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we
reserve for this purpose.

When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the
relevant  (E)ABI  specifications for the current architecture, and by
GCC's implementation.

For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use:
	R1:	stack pointer
6250
	R2:	reserved for system use
W
wdenk 已提交
6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256
	R3-R4:	parameter passing and return values
	R5-R10: parameter passing
	R13:	small data area pointer
	R30:	GOT pointer
	R31:	frame pointer

6257 6258 6259
	(U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12
	is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when
	going back and forth between asm and C)
W
wdenk 已提交
6260

6261
    ==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data
W
wdenk 已提交
6262 6263 6264 6265 6266 6267 6268 6269

    Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the
    address of the global data structure is known at compile time),
    but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat
    smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on
    average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image,
    624 text + 127 data).

6270
On Blackfin, the normal C ABI (except for P3) is followed as documented here:
M
Mike Frysinger 已提交
6271 6272
	http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=application_binary_interface

6273
    ==> U-Boot will use P3 to hold a pointer to the global data
M
Mike Frysinger 已提交
6274

W
wdenk 已提交
6275 6276 6277 6278
On ARM, the following registers are used:

	R0:	function argument word/integer result
	R1-R3:	function argument word
6279 6280
	R9:	platform specific
	R10:	stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled)
W
wdenk 已提交
6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286
	R11:	argument (frame) pointer
	R12:	temporary workspace
	R13:	stack pointer
	R14:	link register
	R15:	program counter

6287 6288 6289
    ==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data

    Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported.
W
wdenk 已提交
6290

T
Thomas Chou 已提交
6291 6292 6293 6294 6295 6296 6297 6298
On Nios II, the ABI is documented here:
	http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf

    ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data

    Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp
    to access small data sections, so gp is free.

6299 6300 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312
On NDS32, the following registers are used:

	R0-R1:	argument/return
	R2-R5:	argument
	R15:	temporary register for assembler
	R16:	trampoline register
	R28:	frame pointer (FP)
	R29:	global pointer (GP)
	R30:	link register (LP)
	R31:	stack pointer (SP)
	PC:	program counter (PC)

    ==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data

6313 6314
NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope,
or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much.
W
wdenk 已提交
6315 6316 6317 6318 6319 6320 6321 6322 6323 6324 6325 6326 6327 6328 6329 6330

Memory Management:
------------------

U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the
MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection.

The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory
controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each
memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several
physical memory banks.

U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on
TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After
booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself
to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some
6331
memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN
W
wdenk 已提交
6332 6333 6334 6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 6345 6346 6347 6348 6349 6350 6351 6352 6353 6354 6355 6356 6357 6358 6359 6360 6361 6362
configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board
Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward).

Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB
of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF).

So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like
this:

	0x0000 0000	Exception Vector code
	      :
	0x0000 1FFF
	0x0000 2000	Free for Application Use
	      :
	      :

	      :
	      :
	0x00FB FF20	Monitor Stack (Growing downward)
	0x00FB FFAC	Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data
	0x00FC 0000	Malloc Arena
	      :
	0x00FD FFFF
	0x00FE 0000	RAM Copy of Monitor Code
	...		eventually: LCD or video framebuffer
	...		eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset)
	0x00FF FFFF	[End of RAM]


System Initialization:
----------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
6363

W
wdenk 已提交
6364
In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point
M
Marcel Ziswiler 已提交
6365
(on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset
6366
configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory.
W
wdenk 已提交
6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 6382 6383 6384 6385 6386 6387 6388 6389 6390 6391 6392 6393 6394 6395 6396 6397 6398 6399 6400
To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address.
To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!)
initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs
which provide such a feature like MPC8xx or MPC8260), or in a locked
part of the data cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core,
the caches and the SIU.

Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a
preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries
(multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash
on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is
programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a
simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM
banks.

When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of
different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first
bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address
0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create
contiguous memory starting from 0.

Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area
and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board
Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM
pages, and the final stack is set up.

Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment;
until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are
running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a
new address in RAM.


U-Boot Porting Guide:
----------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
6401

W
wdenk 已提交
6402 6403
[Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing
list, October 2002]
W
wdenk 已提交
6404 6405


6406
int main(int argc, char *argv[])
W
wdenk 已提交
6407 6408
{
	sighandler_t no_more_time;
W
wdenk 已提交
6409

6410 6411
	signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time);
	alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK));
W
wdenk 已提交
6412

W
wdenk 已提交
6413
	if (available_money > available_manpower) {
6414
		Pay consultant to port U-Boot;
W
wdenk 已提交
6415 6416 6417
		return 0;
	}

W
wdenk 已提交
6418 6419
	Download latest U-Boot source;

6420
	Subscribe to u-boot mailing list;
W
wdenk 已提交
6421

6422 6423
	if (clueless)
		email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?");
W
wdenk 已提交
6424 6425 6426

	while (learning) {
		Read the README file in the top level directory;
6427 6428
		Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual;
		Read applicable doc/*.README;
W
wdenk 已提交
6429
		Read the source, Luke;
6430
		/* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */
W
wdenk 已提交
6431 6432
	}

6433 6434 6435
	if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500))
		Buy a BDI3000;
	else
W
wdenk 已提交
6436 6437
		Add a lot of aggravation and time;

6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446 6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457 6458 6459 6460 6461
	if (a similar board exists) {	/* hopefully... */
		cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard>
		cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h
	} else {
		Create your own board support subdirectory;
		Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file;
	}
	Edit new board/<myboard> files
	Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h

	while (!accepted) {
		while (!running) {
			do {
				Add / modify source code;
			} until (compiles);
			Debug;
			if (clueless)
				email("Hi, I am having problems...");
		}
		Send patch file to the U-Boot email list;
		if (reasonable critiques)
			Incorporate improvements from email list code review;
		else
			Defend code as written;
W
wdenk 已提交
6462 6463 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471
	}

	return 0;
}

void no_more_time (int sig)
{
      hire_a_guru();
}

W
wdenk 已提交
6472

W
wdenk 已提交
6473 6474
Coding Standards:
-----------------
W
wdenk 已提交
6475

W
wdenk 已提交
6476
All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel
6477
coding style; see the file "Documentation/CodingStyle" and the script
6478
"scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory.
6479 6480 6481

Source files originating from a different project (for example the
MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not
6482
reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those
6483 6484 6485 6486 6487
sources.

Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in
Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//)
in your code.
W
wdenk 已提交
6488

W
wdenk 已提交
6489 6490
Please also stick to the following formatting rules:
- remove any trailing white space
6491
- use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces
W
wdenk 已提交
6492
- make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds
6493
- do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files
W
wdenk 已提交
6494
- do not add trailing empty lines to source files
6495

W
wdenk 已提交
6496 6497
Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned
with a request to reformat the changes.
W
wdenk 已提交
6498 6499


W
wdenk 已提交
6500 6501
Submitting Patches:
-------------------
W
wdenk 已提交
6502

W
wdenk 已提交
6503 6504 6505
Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to
establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules
may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff.
W
wdenk 已提交
6506

M
Magnus Lilja 已提交
6507
Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details.
6508

6509 6510 6511
Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>;
see http://lists.denx.de/mailman/listinfo/u-boot

W
wdenk 已提交
6512 6513
When you send a patch, please include the following information with
it:
W
wdenk 已提交
6514

W
wdenk 已提交
6515 6516 6517
* For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes
  this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the
  patch actually fixes something.
W
wdenk 已提交
6518

W
wdenk 已提交
6519 6520
* For new features: a description of the feature and your
  implementation.
W
wdenk 已提交
6521

W
wdenk 已提交
6522
* A CHANGELOG entry as plaintext (separate from the patch)
W
wdenk 已提交
6523

6524 6525
* For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your
  information and associated file and directory references.
W
wdenk 已提交
6526

6527 6528
* When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a
  maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too.
W
wdenk 已提交
6529

W
wdenk 已提交
6530 6531
* If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to
  document these in the README file.
W
wdenk 已提交
6532

6533 6534
* The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly*
  recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the
6535
  "git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to
6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541
  the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems
  with some other mail clients.

  If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of
  diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of
  GNU diff.
W
wdenk 已提交
6542

6543 6544 6545 6546
  The current directory when running this command shall be the parent
  directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that
  your patch includes sufficient directory information for the
  affected files).
W
wdenk 已提交
6547

6548 6549
  We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged,
  and compressed attachments must not be used.
W
wdenk 已提交
6550

W
wdenk 已提交
6551 6552
* If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several
  files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file.
W
wdenk 已提交
6553

W
wdenk 已提交
6554 6555
* Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be
  submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset.
W
wdenk 已提交
6556

W
wdenk 已提交
6557

W
wdenk 已提交
6558
Notes:
W
wdenk 已提交
6559

W
wdenk 已提交
6560 6561 6562
* Before sending the patch, run the MAKEALL script on your patched
  source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported
  for any of the boards.
W
wdenk 已提交
6563

W
wdenk 已提交
6564 6565 6566
* Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch
  containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be
  returned with a request to re-formatting / split it.
W
wdenk 已提交
6567

W
wdenk 已提交
6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 6573
* If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not
  add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful!
  When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only
  (using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature
  disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your
  modification.
6574

6575 6576 6577 6578
* Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the
  u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are
  reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches
  bigger than the size limit should be avoided.